TW201512310A - Display device - Google Patents

Display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201512310A
TW201512310A TW103131258A TW103131258A TW201512310A TW 201512310 A TW201512310 A TW 201512310A TW 103131258 A TW103131258 A TW 103131258A TW 103131258 A TW103131258 A TW 103131258A TW 201512310 A TW201512310 A TW 201512310A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
group
light
substituent
display device
green
Prior art date
Application number
TW103131258A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Koutaro Okabe
Daisuke Sasaki
Kazumasa Morozumi
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of TW201512310A publication Critical patent/TW201512310A/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/205Neutral density filters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09KMATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
    • C09K11/00Luminescent, e.g. electroluminescent, chemiluminescent materials
    • C09K11/08Luminescent, e.g. electroluminescent, chemiluminescent materials containing inorganic luminescent materials
    • C09K11/88Luminescent, e.g. electroluminescent, chemiluminescent materials containing inorganic luminescent materials containing selenium, tellurium or unspecified chalcogen elements
    • C09K11/881Chalcogenides
    • C09K11/883Chalcogenides with zinc or cadmium
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133509Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
    • G02F1/133514Colour filters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/30Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
    • H10K59/38Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising colour filters or colour changing media [CCM]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0013Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide
    • G02B6/0023Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed between the light guide and the light source, or around the light source
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/005Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/1336Illuminating devices
    • G02F1/133614Illuminating devices using photoluminescence, e.g. phosphors illuminated by UV or blue light

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Luminescent Compositions (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a display device including: a primary light source emitting a primary light; a light converting part including a quantum dot absorbing at least a portion of the primary light and emitting a green light; and a green color filter transmitting the green light and including a phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1).

Description

顯示裝置 Display device

本發明是有關於一種顯示裝置。 The present invention relates to a display device.

近年來,除了電視影像接收器以外,作為個人電腦用的監視器等彩色顯示顯示器,具有彩色濾光片的顯示裝置(例如液晶顯示裝置、有機電致發光顯示裝置等)廣泛普及。隨之,於進行面向顯示裝置的大型化、薄型化及輕量化的開發的同時,亦盛行研究用以實現更鮮明的圖像、更美觀的圖像的技術。 In recent years, display devices having color filters (for example, liquid crystal display devices, organic electroluminescence display devices, and the like) have been widely used as color display displays such as monitors for personal computers in addition to television image receivers. In response to the development of large-scale, thinner, and lighter display devices, technologies for achieving more vivid images and more beautiful images have also been studied.

此種顯示裝置例如包括:發出白色光的光源、以及藉由將由光源發出的白色光進行調變而顯示圖像的顯示面板。 Such a display device includes, for example, a light source that emits white light, and a display panel that displays an image by modulating white light emitted from the light source.

通常,顯示面板具備多個畫素,所述畫素具有:透射紅色(R)的光(紅色光)的紅色濾光片、透射綠色(G)的光(綠色光)的綠色濾光片、以及透射藍色(B)的光(藍色光)的藍色濾光片。藉此,由光源射入至顯示面板的光基於圖像資料,藉由各畫素來調變,進行全彩圖像的顯示。 Generally, the display panel is provided with a plurality of pixels, the pixel having a red filter that transmits red (R) light (red light), a green filter that transmits green (G) light (green light), And a blue filter that transmits blue (B) light (blue light). Thereby, the light incident on the display panel by the light source is modulated based on the image data by the respective pixels, and the full color image is displayed.

但,以所述方式顯示的圖像中,在彩色濾光片的特性方面,除了容易透射過彩色濾光片的R、G、B的光以外,雖透射量少,但仍包含R、G、B的中間色的波長的光。 However, in the image displayed as described above, in terms of the characteristics of the color filter, in addition to the light of R, G, and B which are easily transmitted through the color filter, although the amount of transmission is small, R, G is still contained. Light of the intermediate color of B.

圖3是表示現有彩色濾光片的分光相對透射率光譜的特性圖。圖3中,曲線R、曲線G、以及曲線B分別表示現有的紅色濾光片的透射率光譜、現有的綠色濾光片的透射率光譜、以及現有的藍色濾光片的透射率光譜。 Fig. 3 is a characteristic diagram showing a spectral versus transmittance spectrum of a conventional color filter. In FIG. 3, the curve R, the curve G, and the curve B respectively indicate the transmittance spectrum of the conventional red filter, the transmittance spectrum of the conventional green filter, and the transmittance spectrum of the conventional blue filter.

由圖3瞭解到,通過藍色濾光片的光中包含B與G的中間色的波長的光,通過綠色濾光片的光中包含B與G的中間色的波長的光以及G與R的中間色的波長的光,通過紅色濾光片的光中包含G與R的中間色的波長的光。 It is understood from Fig. 3 that the light passing through the blue filter contains light of a wavelength of an intermediate color of B and G, and the light passing through the green filter contains light of a wavelength of an intermediate color of B and G and an intermediate color of G and R. The light of the wavelength, the light passing through the red filter contains light of a wavelength of the intermediate color of G and R.

該些通過彩色濾光片的R、G、B的各種顏色的光的色純度降低,其結果為,存在所顯示的圖像中難以獲得充分的色再現性的問題。 The color purity of the light of each of R, G, and B passing through the color filter is lowered, and as a result, there is a problem that it is difficult to obtain sufficient color reproducibility in the displayed image.

另一方面,液晶顯示裝置中使用的白色光源(背光)除了冷陰極螢光燈(CCFL;Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp)以外,於因應近年來的薄型化或省電需求的藍色發光二極體(以下將發光二極體亦稱為「LED」(Light Emitting Diode))或者紫外線發光LED中組合黃色的螢光體、或者紅色的螢光體以及綠色的螢光體而成的白色LED方式的背光已上市。 On the other hand, in addition to a cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL), a white light source (backlight) used in a liquid crystal display device is a blue light emitting diode in response to recent thinning or power saving requirements ( Hereinafter, a light-emitting diode (also referred to as "LED" (Light Emitting Diode) or a white LED type backlight in which a yellow phosphor, a red phosphor, and a green phosphor are combined with an ultraviolet light-emitting LED Fuk.

該些光源由於包含相當於R與G的中間色、或者G與B的中間色的副光譜、或光譜自身寬廣,故而亦發出大量相當於中間色的波長的光。這成為圖像的色再現性下降(色再現區域的縮小)的原因。 Since these light sources include a sub-spectrum corresponding to an intermediate color of R and G, or a sub-spectrum of an intermediate color of G and B, or a spectrum itself, a large amount of light corresponding to a wavelength of an intermediate color is also emitted. This is a cause of a decrease in the color reproducibility of the image (reduction of the color reproduction region).

例如,圖3中亦表示由射入來自藍色LED的藍色光的 釔鋁石榴石(yttrium aluminum garnet,YAG)螢光體所發射出的白色光的分光相對發光光譜(曲線LED-BL)來作為現有的背光的分光相對發光光譜的一例。該曲線LED-BL中包含相當於R與G的中間色的580nm以上、610nm以下的波長的光。 For example, Figure 3 also shows the blue light from the blue LED. The spectroscopic relative luminescence spectrum (curve LED-BL) of white light emitted from a yttrium aluminum garnet (YAG) phosphor is used as an example of a spectroscopic relative luminescence spectrum of a conventional backlight. The curve LED-BL includes light having a wavelength corresponding to 580 nm or more and 610 nm or less of an intermediate color of R and G.

提高顯示裝置所顯示的圖像的色再現性的方法(即,擴大圖像的色再現區域的方法)通常為提高各種顏色的彩色濾光片的色純度的方法。 A method of increasing the color reproducibility of an image displayed by a display device (that is, a method of enlarging a color reproduction region of an image) is generally a method of increasing the color purity of a color filter of each color.

具體而言,可列舉對用於形成彩色濾光片的著色感光性組成物加以改善的方法。 Specifically, a method of improving the coloring photosensitive composition for forming a color filter can be mentioned.

但是,就維持著色感光性組成物的圖案形成性或可靠性等特性的觀點而言,著色感光性組成物中所含有的有色材料量受到限制,無法期待大幅度的色純度提高。 However, from the viewpoint of maintaining properties such as pattern formation property and reliability of the coloring photosensitive composition, the amount of the coloring material contained in the coloring photosensitive composition is limited, and a large color purity cannot be expected to be improved.

另外,提高圖像的色再現性的方法亦可列舉如下方法:自藉由磊晶而分別成長來製作的包含藍色LED、紅色LED、以及綠色LED的陣列,分別發射出紅色光、藍色光以及綠色光,使用該些光來作為射入至顯示面板的光(例如參照美國專利第6608614號說明書以及美國專利第6768525號說明書)。 Further, a method of improving the color reproducibility of an image may be a method in which an array including a blue LED, a red LED, and a green LED, which are respectively grown by epitaxy, emits red light and blue light, respectively. And the green light, which is used as the light incident on the display panel (for example, refer to the specification of US Pat. No. 6,608,614 and the specification of US Pat. No. 6,685,255).

另外,提高圖像的色再現性的方法亦可列舉:使用單色的LED作為一次光源(primary light source),使來自該單色的LED的光射入至將該光的全部或者一部分轉換為其他波長的光的介質(例如螢光體),藉此產生白色光,將所產生的白色光射入至顯示面板。 Further, a method of improving the color reproducibility of an image may be exemplified by using a single-color LED as a primary light source to inject light from the monochromatic LED to convert all or a part of the light into A medium of other wavelengths of light (for example, a phosphor), thereby generating white light, and injecting the generated white light into the display panel.

例如已知如下方法:藉由將由作為一次光源的藍色LED所產生的藍色光,照射至作為螢光體而配置於導光板間的發射出紅色光的量子點(QD;quantum dot)以及發射出綠色光的量子點,從而產生白色光,將所產生的白色光射入至顯示面板(例如參照日本專利特開2012-169271號公報)。 For example, a method is known in which a blue light generated by a blue LED as a primary light source is irradiated to a quantum dot (QD; quantum dot) emitting light emitted between the light guide plates as a phosphor and emitting light A quantum dot of green light is emitted to generate white light, and the generated white light is incident on the display panel (for example, refer to Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2012-169271).

另外,已知有在液晶顯示面板內配置有包含所述量子點的光轉換層的構成的液晶顯示面板以及液晶顯示裝置(例如參照日本專利特開2013-15812號公報)。 In addition, a liquid crystal display panel and a liquid crystal display device in which a light conversion layer including the quantum dots is disposed in a liquid crystal display panel are known (for example, refer to Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2013-15812).

進而,亦已知利用使用所述量子點的光轉換片(亦稱為「QDEF」(量子點強化膜(quantum dot enhancement film))或「量子點片」)的方法(例如參照「二次成像傳播(Secondary Imagery Dissemination,SID)研討會論文摘要(Symposium Digest of Technical Papers)」2012年6月第43卷第1期第895-896頁)。 Further, a method of using a light conversion sheet (also referred to as "QDEF" (quantum dot enhancement film) or "quantum dot sheet") using the quantum dots is also known (for example, referring to "secondary imaging" Secondary Imagery Dissemination (SID) Sympium Digest of Technical Papers, June 2012, Vol. 43, No. 1, pp. 895-896).

但是,使用包含各種藍色LED、紅色LED、以及綠色LED的陣列的方法(例如美國專利第6608614號說明書以及美國專利第6768525號說明書)雖可達成高的NTSC(National Television System Committee,國家電視標準委員會)比,但存在花費製造成本的問題。另外,存在產生顏色混合的顧慮、或為了驅動LED而需要的電子電路變得複雜的顧慮。進而,存在3種顏色的LED中每種顏色的劣化速度不同的顧慮,因此,有在長時間 的運作中導致顏色變化的顧慮。進而,存在如下問題,即,製造有效率的綠色的LED仍然是難題。 However, a method using an array including various blue LEDs, red LEDs, and green LEDs (for example, U.S. Patent No. 6,608,614 and U.S. Patent No. 6,685,255) can achieve a high NTSC (National Television System Committee). Committee), but there is a problem with the cost of manufacturing. In addition, there is a concern that color mixing may occur or an electronic circuit required to drive an LED may become complicated. Further, there is a concern that the deterioration speed of each of the three colors of LEDs is different, and therefore, there is a long time The cause of color change in the operation. Further, there is a problem that manufacturing an efficient green LED is still a problem.

另外,根據本發明者等的研究來判明,使用量子點來獲得白色光的方法(例如日本專利特開2012-169271號公報及日本專利特開2013-15812號公報、以及「二次成像傳播(Secondary Imagery Dissemination,SID)研討會論文摘要(Symposium Digest of Technical Papers)」2012年6月第43卷第1期第895-896頁)中,雖可大幅度提高各種顏色的光的色純度,但存在透射過綠色濾光片的光(綠色光)的亮度下降的情況。 In addition, according to the study by the inventors of the present invention, a method of obtaining white light using quantum dots has been found (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei. No. 2012-169271 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei. No. 2013-15812, and "Second Imaging Propagation ( Secondary Imagery Dissemination, SID) Symposium Digest of Technical Papers, June 2012, Vol. 43, No. 1, pp. 895-896), although the color purity of light of various colors can be greatly improved, There is a case where the brightness of light (green light) transmitted through the green filter is lowered.

關於對圖像整體的亮度以及圖像的色再現性的影響,紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光中,特別是綠色光的亮度的影響最大。 Regarding the influence on the brightness of the entire image and the color reproducibility of the image, among the red light, the green light, and the blue light, particularly the brightness of the green light has the greatest influence.

因此,為了提高圖像整體的亮度以及圖像的色再現性,特別重要的是提高綠色光的亮度。 Therefore, in order to improve the brightness of the entire image and the color reproducibility of the image, it is particularly important to increase the brightness of the green light.

本發明的態樣包含以下態樣。 Aspects of the invention include the following aspects.

<1>一種顯示裝置,其包括:一次光源,發射出一次光;光轉換部,含有吸收所述一次光的至少一部分而發射出綠色光的量子點;以及綠色濾光片,透射所述綠色光,且含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物, <1> A display device comprising: a primary light source that emits primary light; a light conversion portion that includes quantum dots that absorb at least a portion of the primary light to emit green light; and a green filter that transmits the green color Light, and containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1),

[通式(1)中,存在多個的X分別獨立地表示鹵素原子;存在多個的R1分別獨立地表示下述通式(2)或通式(3)所表示的基團;存在多個的R分別獨立地表示氫原子或者1價取代基;M表示Cu、Zn、V(=O)、Mg、Ni、Ti(=O)、Sn、或者Si;多個a分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個n分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個r分別獨立地表示0~4的整數;其中,多個a中至少1個為1以上,多個n中至少1個為1以上;多個a、多個n與多個r的總和為16] In the general formula (1), a plurality of X atoms independently represent a halogen atom; and a plurality of R 1 each independently represent a group represented by the following formula (2) or (3); A plurality of R each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent; M represents Cu, Zn, V(=O), Mg, Ni, Ti(=O), Sn, or Si; and a plurality of a are independently represented An integer of 0 to 4, a plurality of n each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a plurality of r independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; wherein at least one of the plurality of a is 1 or more, and at least one of the plurality of n 1 is 1 or more; the sum of multiple a, multiple n and multiple r is 16]

[通式(2)及通式(3)中,存在b個的R2分別獨立地表示選自由下述通式(4)~通式(6)所組成的組群中的1價取代基;R3表示1價取代基;b表示1~5的整數,c表示0~4的整數;其中,通式(2)中,b與c的合計不會超過5;Y表示-O-、-S-、-SO2-、或者-NR8-;R8表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基] [In the general formula (2) and the general formula (3), the presence of b of R 2 independently represents a monovalent substituent selected from the group consisting of the following general formulae (4) to (6); R 3 represents a monovalent substituent; b represents an integer of 1 to 5, and c represents an integer of 0 to 4; wherein, in the general formula (2), the total of b and c does not exceed 5; Y represents -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -NR 8 -; R 8 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent]

[通式(4)中,R4表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的氧烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的芳基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基 胺基;通式(5)中,d表示0~2的整數,於d為0或1的情況下,R5表示可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基,於d為2的情況下,R5表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基;通式(6)中,R6表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基羰基、可具有取代基的芳基羰基、可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基,R7表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基]。 [In the formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an oxyalkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, and a dialkylamino group having a substituent, an arylamine group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent; in the formula (5) d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and in the case where d is 2, R 5 represents An alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent In the formula (6), R 6 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, and a substituent which may have a substituent An alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, R 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic group which may have a substituent base].

<2>如<1>所述的顯示裝置,其中所述一次光為藍色光。 <2> The display device according to <1>, wherein the primary light is blue light.

<3>如<2>所述的顯示裝置,其中所述一次光源包含藍色發光二極體。 <3> The display device according to <2>, wherein the primary light source comprises a blue light emitting diode.

<4>如<1>~<3>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述光轉換部更含有吸收所述一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的無機螢光體,且藉由透射所述一次光的一部分而將所述一次光轉換為白色光。 The display device according to any one of <1>, wherein the light conversion unit further includes an inorganic phosphor that absorbs a part of the primary light and emits red light, and The primary light is converted to white light by transmitting a portion of the primary light.

<5>如<4>所述的顯示裝置,其中所述無機螢光體為量子點。 <5> The display device according to <4>, wherein the inorganic phosphor is a quantum dot.

<6>如<1>~<5>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色光的發光光譜於波長500nm~550nm的範圍內具有極大值。 The display device according to any one of <1> to <5> wherein the light emission spectrum of the green light has a maximum value in a wavelength range of 500 nm to 550 nm.

<7>如<4>所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色光的發光光譜 的半高寬為20nm~80nm。 <7> The display device according to <4>, wherein the luminescence spectrum of the green light The full width at half maximum is 20 nm to 80 nm.

<8>如<1>~<7>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其中於所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中,存在於波長460nm~550nm的範圍內具有極大值的波峰。 The display device according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein the transmission spectrum of the green filter has a peak having a maximum value in a wavelength range of 460 nm to 550 nm.

<9>如<7>所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中的所述波峰的半高寬為80nm~200nm。 <9> The display device according to <7>, wherein a half-height of the peak in a transmission spectrum of the green filter is 80 nm to 200 nm.

<10>如<8>或<9>所述的顯示裝置,其中於所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中,波長500nm~530nm的範圍內的透射率為90%以上。 <10> The display device according to <8>, wherein a transmittance in a range of wavelengths of 500 nm to 530 nm is 90% or more in a transmission spectrum of the green filter.

<11>如<1>~<10>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色濾光片更含有黃色染料。 The display device according to any one of <1> to <10> wherein the green filter further contains a yellow dye.

<12>如<1>~<11>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述量子點為包含選自由II-VI族化合物、III-V族化合物、IV-VI族化合物、以及IV族化合物所組成的組群中的至少1種的半導體奈米粒子。 The display device according to any one of <1> to <11> wherein the quantum dot is selected from the group consisting of a group II-VI compound, a group III-V compound, a group IV-VI compound, and IV At least one type of semiconductor nanoparticle in a group consisting of a group of compounds.

<13>如<1>~<12>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述量子點為包含選自由CdSe、CdTe、ZnS、ZnSe、ZnTe、ZnO、HgS、HgSe、HgTe、CdSeS、CdSeTe、CdSTe、ZnSeS、ZnSeTe、ZnSTe、HgSeS、HgSeTe、HgSTe、CdZnS、CdZnSe、CdZnTe、CdHgS、CdHgSe、CdHgTe、HgZnS、HgZnSe、HgZnTe、CdZnSeS、CdZnSeTe、CdZnSTe、CdHgSeS、CdHgSeTe、CdHgSTe、HgZnSeS、HgZnSeTe、HgZnSTe、GaN、GaP、GaAs、GaSb、AlN、AlP、AlAs、AlSb、 InN、InP、InAs、InSb、GaNP、GaNAs、GaNSb、GaPAs、GaPSb、AlNP、AlNAs、AlNSb、AlPAs、AlPSb、InNP、InNAs、InNSb、InPAs、InPSb、GaAlNP、GaAlNAs、GaAlNSb、GaAlPAs、GaAlPSb、GaInNP、GaInNAs、GaInNSb、GaInPAs、GaInPSb、InAlNP、InAlNAs、InAlNSb、InAlPAs、InAlPSb、SnS、SnSe、SnTe、PbS、PbSe、PbTe、SnSeS、SnSeTe、SnSTe、PbSeS、PbSeTe、PbSTe、SnPbS、SnPbSe、SnPbTe、SnPbSSe、SnPbSeTe、SnPbSTe、Si、Ge、SiC、以及SiGe所組成的組群中的至少1種的半導體奈米粒子。 The display device according to any one of <1> to <12> wherein the quantum dot is selected from the group consisting of CdSe, CdTe, ZnS, ZnSe, ZnTe, ZnO, HgS, HgSe, HgTe, CdSeS, CdSeTe, CdSTe, ZnSeS, ZnSeTe, ZnSTe, HgSeS, HgSeTe, HgSTe, CdZnS, CdZnSe, CdZnTe, CdHgS, CdHgSe, CdHgTe, HgZnS, HgZnSe, HgZnTe, CdZnSeS, CdZnSeTe, CdZnSTe, CdHgSeS, CdHgSeTe, CdHgSTe, HgZnSeS, HgZnSeTe, HgZnSTe, GaN, GaP, GaAs, GaSb, AlN, AlP, AlAs, AlSb, InN, InP, InAs, InSb, GaNP, GaNAs, GaNSb, GaPAs, GaPSb, AlNP, AlNAs, AlNSb, AlPAs, AlPSb, InNP, InNAs, InNSb, InPAs, InPSb, GaAlNP, GaAlNAs, GaAlNSb, GaAlPAs, GaAlPSb, GaInNP, GaInNAs, GaInNSb, GaInPAs, GaInPSb, InAlNP, InAlNAs, InAlNSb, InAlPAs, InAlPSb, SnS, SnSe, SnTe, PbS, PbSe, PbTe, SnSeS, SnSeTe, SnSTe, PbSeS, PbSeTe, PbSTe, SnPbS, SnPbSe, SnPbTe, SnPbSSe, At least one semiconductor nanoparticle of a group consisting of SnPbSeTe, SnPbSTe, Si, Ge, SiC, and SiGe.

<14>如<1>~<11>中任一項所述的顯示裝置,其包括:所述一次光源、所述光轉換部、以及包含所述綠色濾光片的液晶顯示面板或者有機電致發光顯示面板。 The display device according to any one of <1> to <11>, comprising: the primary light source, the light conversion portion, and a liquid crystal display panel or the organic battery including the green filter A light-emitting display panel.

依據本發明來提供可顯示綠色光的亮度高的圖像的顯示裝置。 According to the present invention, a display device capable of displaying an image of high luminance of green light is provided.

10B‧‧‧藍色濾光片 10B‧‧‧Blue filter

10G‧‧‧綠色濾光片 10G‧‧‧Green Filter

10R‧‧‧紅色濾光片 10R‧‧‧Red Filter

12‧‧‧透光性基板 12‧‧‧Transmissive substrate

14‧‧‧帶有彩色濾光片的基板 14‧‧‧Substrate with color filter

20‧‧‧液晶層 20‧‧‧Liquid layer

22‧‧‧對向基板 22‧‧‧ Alignment substrate

30‧‧‧液晶顯示面板 30‧‧‧LCD panel

40‧‧‧藍色LED(一次光源) 40‧‧‧Blue LED (primary light source)

42‧‧‧光轉換構件(光轉換部) 42‧‧‧Light conversion member (light conversion unit)

46‧‧‧導光構件 46‧‧‧Light guiding members

52‧‧‧光轉換片 52‧‧‧Light conversion film

60‧‧‧多個藍色LED 60‧‧‧Multiple blue LEDs

61‧‧‧殼體 61‧‧‧Shell

62‧‧‧直下式藍色LED單元 62‧‧‧Direct type blue LED unit

100、200、300‧‧‧液晶顯示裝置 100, 200, 300‧‧‧ liquid crystal display device

R、G、B‧‧‧量子點 R, G, B‧‧· Quantum dots

圖1A是概念性表示第1實施形態的顯示裝置的概略剖面圖。 Fig. 1A is a schematic cross-sectional view conceptually showing a display device according to a first embodiment.

圖1B是概念性表示第2實施形態的顯示裝置的概略剖面圖。 Fig. 1B is a schematic cross-sectional view conceptually showing a display device of a second embodiment.

圖1C是概念性表示第3實施形態的顯示裝置的概略剖面圖。 Fig. 1C is a schematic cross-sectional view conceptually showing a display device according to a third embodiment.

圖2是表示實施例1及比較例2中的帶有綠色濾光片的基板的透射率光譜的特性圖。 2 is a characteristic diagram showing a transmittance spectrum of a substrate with a green filter in Example 1 and Comparative Example 2. FIG.

圖3是表示現有的彩色濾光片的分光相對透射率光譜的特性圖。 3 is a characteristic diagram showing a spectroscopic versus transmittance spectrum of a conventional color filter.

以下,對本發明的具體實施形態進行詳細說明,但本發明不受以下實施形態的任何限定。 Hereinafter, specific embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments.

本發明的顯示裝置包括:一次光源,發射出一次光;光轉換部,含有吸收所述一次光的至少一部分而發射出綠色光的量子點(以下亦稱為「量子點G」);以及綠色濾光片,透射由所述量子點發射出的綠色光,且含有後述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物。本發明的顯示裝置亦可包括其他的構件。 The display device of the present invention includes: a primary light source that emits primary light; and a light conversion portion that includes quantum dots that absorb at least a portion of the primary light to emit green light (hereinafter also referred to as "quantum dot G"); The filter transmits green light emitted from the quantum dot and contains a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1). The display device of the present invention may also include other components.

即,本發明的顯示裝置沿著來自一次光源的光程,將光轉換部以及綠色濾光片自一次光源起依次配置。此處所謂的光程未必限定為直線狀(參照後述的圖1A及圖1B)。 That is, the display device of the present invention arranges the light conversion portion and the green filter in order from the primary light source along the optical path from the primary light source. The optical path referred to here is not necessarily limited to a linear shape (see FIGS. 1A and 1B described later).

本發明中,所謂「綠色光」,是指被視認為綠色的所有光(於綠色的波長區域具有強度的所有光),當然並不是限定為單一波長的光的用語。關於後述「紅色光」以及「藍色光」亦相同。 In the present invention, "green light" refers to all light that is considered to be green (all light having intensity in a green wavelength region), and is of course not limited to light of a single wavelength. The same applies to "red light" and "blue light" which will be described later.

本發明的顯示裝置中,可藉由所述構成來提高綠色光(詳細而言為透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光)的亮度。因此,可顯示出綠色光的亮度高的圖像。 In the display device of the present invention, the brightness of green light (specifically, green light after being transmitted through the green filter) can be improved by the above configuration. Therefore, an image with high luminance of green light can be displayed.

另外,本發明的顯示裝置中,藉由使用量子點G,亦可提高綠色光(詳細而言為透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光)的色純度。 Further, in the display device of the present invention, by using the quantum dot G, the color purity of green light (specifically, green light after being transmitted through the green filter) can be improved.

因此,依據本發明的顯示裝置,可提高圖像整體的亮度以及 的圖像的色再現性(擴大圖像的色再現區域)。 Therefore, according to the display device of the present invention, the brightness of the entire image can be improved as well Color reproducibility of an image (enlarged color reproduction area of an image).

本發明的顯示裝置中可提高綠色光的亮度的原因推測如下。 The reason why the brightness of green light can be improved in the display device of the present invention is presumed as follows.

由現有的白色LED(例如使用YAG螢光體的白色LED)發射出的白色光中的綠色光(以下亦稱為「現有的綠色光」)的發光光譜於較作為綠色而理想的波長區域更長的波長側具有極大值,且成為寬廣的光譜(例如參照後述的圖2及圖3)。與此相對,與現有的綠色光的發光光譜相比較,由量子點G發射出的綠色光的發光光譜於短波長側具有極大值,且成為尖銳的(半高寬小的)光譜(例如參照後述的圖2)。因此,藉由使用由量子點G發射出的綠色光作為顯示裝置的光源,可提高所顯示的圖像中的綠色光的亮度以及色純度。 The luminescence spectrum of green light (hereinafter also referred to as "existing green light") of white light emitted from a conventional white LED (for example, a white LED using a YAG phosphor) is more desirable than a green wavelength region. The long wavelength side has a maximum value and has a broad spectrum (for example, refer to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 described later). On the other hand, compared with the luminescence spectrum of the conventional green light, the luminescence spectrum of the green light emitted from the quantum dot G has a maximum value on the short-wavelength side and becomes a sharp (semi-high-width-small) spectrum (for example, reference) Figure 2) described later. Therefore, by using the green light emitted from the quantum dot G as a light source of the display device, the luminance and color purity of the green light in the displayed image can be improved.

此處,本發明的顯示裝置包括含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的綠色濾光片。該綠色濾光片與含有現有的有色材料(例如C.I.顏料綠58、C.I.顏料綠36等)的綠色濾光片相比較,於短波長側具有透射率的極大值,而且綠色的波長區域整體的透射率提高(例如參照後述的圖2)。 Here, the display device of the present invention includes a green filter containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1). The green filter has a maximum value of transmittance on the short-wavelength side and a green wavelength region as a whole, compared with a green filter containing a conventional colored material (for example, CI Pigment Green 58, CI Pigment Green 36, etc.). The transmittance is improved (for example, refer to FIG. 2 described later).

根據以上情況可知,將量子點G與含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的綠色濾光片組合而成的本發明的顯示裝置中,由量子點G帶來的綠色光的亮度提高的效果變得更顯著,其結果為,認為可提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。 According to the above, in the display device of the present invention in which the quantum dot G and the green filter containing the phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1) are combined, the luminance of the green light by the quantum dot G is improved. The effect becomes more remarkable, and as a result, it is considered that the brightness of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be improved.

本發明中的量子點的較佳態樣如後述。 Preferred aspects of the quantum dots in the present invention will be described later.

本發明的顯示裝置中,所述一次光較佳為藍色光。 In the display device of the present invention, the primary light is preferably blue light.

眾所周知,藍色光較綠色光而言能量更大,因此藉由所述一次光為藍色光,光轉換部的光轉換的效率進一步提高。 As is well known, blue light is more energy than green light, and therefore, by the primary light being blue light, the efficiency of light conversion by the light conversion portion is further improved.

另外,所述一次光為藍色光時,亦具有不需要使光轉換部中含有產生藍色光的螢光體(例如後述的量子點B)的優點。 Further, when the primary light is blue light, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to include a phosphor (for example, a quantum dot B to be described later) that generates blue light in the light conversion portion.

所述一次光為藍色光的態樣特佳為一次光源包含藍色發光二極體(藍色LED)的態樣。藍色LED由於可發射出色純度優異的藍色光,故而藉由一次光源包含藍色LED,而於所顯示的圖像中,可進一步提高藍色光的亮度,進而可進一步提高圖像整體的亮度以及圖像的色再現性。 The aspect in which the primary light is blue light is particularly preferably a state in which the primary light source includes a blue light emitting diode (blue LED). Since the blue LED can emit blue light having excellent excellent purity, the primary light source includes the blue LED, and the brightness of the blue light can be further increased in the displayed image, thereby further improving the brightness of the entire image and The color reproducibility of the image.

本發明的顯示裝置較佳為如下態樣:光轉換部更含有吸收一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的無機螢光體,且藉由透射一次光的一部分而將一次光轉換為白色光。 The display device of the present invention preferably has a state in which the light conversion portion further contains an inorganic phosphor that absorbs a part of the primary light and emits red light, and converts the primary light into white light by transmitting a part of the primary light.

此處,「白色光」是指至少混合有藍色光、紅色光、以及綠色光的光。 Here, "white light" means light in which at least blue light, red light, and green light are mixed.

該態樣中,例如於使用藍色光作為一次光的情況下,射入至光轉換部的藍色光(一次光)中,一部分以藍色光的狀態透射過光轉換部,其他的一部分藉由量子點G轉換為綠色光而由所述光轉換部發射出,進而其他的一部分藉由無機螢光體轉換為紅色光而由光轉換部發射出。其結果為,由光轉換部發射出至少混合有所述藍色光、所述綠色光、以及所述紅色光的白色光。如此一來,於光轉換部中,一次光被轉換為白色光。 In this aspect, for example, when blue light is used as the primary light, part of the blue light (primary light) incident on the light conversion portion is partially transmitted through the light conversion portion in the state of blue light, and the other portion is quantum. The point G is converted into green light and emitted by the light converting portion, and the other portion is converted into red light by the inorganic phosphor and emitted by the light converting portion. As a result, white light in which at least the blue light, the green light, and the red light are mixed is emitted by the light conversion unit. In this way, in the light conversion unit, the primary light is converted into white light.

該態樣中,對於吸收一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的無機螢光體並無特別限定,亦可使用量子點以外的公知的無機螢光體(例如後述的YAG系螢光體、鋱鋁石榴石(terbium aluminum garnet,TAG)系螢光體、矽鋁氮氧化物(sialon)系螢光體、正矽酸鋇(barium orthosilicate,BOS)系螢光體等),但較佳為使用吸收一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的量子點(以下亦稱為「量子點R」)。藉此,由於可提高白色光中所含的紅色光的色純度,故而於顯示的圖像中,可進一步提高紅色光的亮度,進而可進一步提高圖像整體的亮度以及的圖像的色再現性。 In this aspect, the inorganic phosphor that emits red light by absorbing a part of the primary light is not particularly limited, and a known inorganic phosphor other than the quantum dot (for example, a YAG-based phosphor to be described later or a ruthenium) may be used. Aluminium garnet (TAG) is a phosphor, a sialon-based phosphor, a barium orthosilicate (BOS) phosphor, etc., but is preferably used. A quantum dot that absorbs a part of the primary light and emits red light (hereinafter also referred to as "quantum dot R"). Thereby, since the color purity of the red light contained in the white light can be improved, the brightness of the red light can be further increased in the displayed image, and the brightness of the entire image and the color reproduction of the image can be further improved. Sex.

本發明中的光轉換部中可含有吸收一次光而發射出藍色光的無機螢光體(例如後述的量子點以外的無機螢光體,較佳為吸收一次光而發射出藍色光的量子點(以下亦稱為「量子點B」))。其中,特別是於使用藍色光作為一次光的情況下,不需要使光轉換部中含有發射出藍色光的無機螢光體。 In the light conversion unit of the present invention, an inorganic phosphor that absorbs primary light and emits blue light (for example, an inorganic phosphor other than a quantum dot to be described later, preferably a quantum dot that absorbs primary light and emits blue light) may be contained. (hereinafter also referred to as "quantum dot B")). Among them, in particular, when blue light is used as the primary light, it is not necessary to include the inorganic phosphor that emits blue light in the light conversion portion.

本發明的顯示裝置中,由量子點G發射出的綠色光的發光光譜(波峰)較佳為於波長500nm~550nm的範圍內具有極大值。該態樣中,由於與所述波峰對應的綠色光的色純度特別高,故而可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。 In the display device of the present invention, the emission spectrum (peak) of the green light emitted from the quantum dot G preferably has a maximum value in the range of wavelengths of 500 nm to 550 nm. In this aspect, since the color purity of the green light corresponding to the peak is particularly high, the luminance of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further improved.

所述極大值更佳為存在於波長500nm~540nm的範圍內,特佳為存在於波長510nm~540nm的範圍內。 The maximum value is preferably in the range of 500 nm to 540 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 510 nm to 540 nm.

本發明中,由量子點G發射出的綠色光的發光光譜(或者由光轉換部發射出的白色光的發光光譜)是指使用分光放射 計,將自該分光放射計至樣本(光轉換部)的距離設為70mm,且將測定角設為0.2度來測定的光譜。 In the present invention, the luminescence spectrum of the green light emitted by the quantum dot G (or the luminescence spectrum of the white light emitted by the light conversion portion) means the use of spectroscopic radiation The spectrum measured from the spectroradiometer to the sample (light conversion unit) was set to 70 mm, and the measurement angle was set to 0.2 degrees.

所述白色光的光譜以及綠色光的光譜可使用例如拓普康(Topcon)(股)製造的分光放射計「SR-3」,將測定模式設為「自動」,對於測定波長範圍380nm~780nm,以所述測定條件來測定。 For the spectrum of the white light and the spectrum of the green light, for example, a spectroradiometer "SR-3" manufactured by Topcon Co., Ltd. can be used, and the measurement mode is set to "automatic" for the measurement wavelength range of 380 nm to 780 nm. The measurement was carried out under the measurement conditions described above.

另外,所述綠色光的發光光譜較佳為半高寬(FWHM;Full Width at Half Maximum)為20nm~80nm。 In addition, the light emission spectrum of the green light is preferably a full width at half maximum (FWHM; 20 nm to 80 nm).

若所述半高寬為80nm以下,則所述綠色光的色純度特別高,因此可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。另一方面,若所述半高寬為20nm以上,則可進一步增大透射過綠色濾光片的綠色光的透射量,因此可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。 If the full width at half maximum is 80 nm or less, the color purity of the green light is particularly high, so that the brightness of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further improved. On the other hand, if the full width at half maximum is 20 nm or more, the amount of transmission of the green light transmitted through the green color filter can be further increased, so that the luminance of the green light after being transmitted through the green color filter can be further improved.

所述綠色光的發光光譜的半高寬更佳為20nm~60nm,特佳為20nm~50nm。 The full width at half maximum of the light emission spectrum of the green light is preferably 20 nm to 60 nm, and particularly preferably 20 nm to 50 nm.

另外,本發明的顯示裝置中,較佳為於綠色濾光片的透射光譜中,存在於波長460nm~550nm的範圍內具有極大值的波峰的態樣。 Further, in the display device of the present invention, it is preferable that the display layer of the green filter has a peak having a maximum value in a wavelength range of 460 nm to 550 nm.

藉由所述波峰的極大值存在於波長460nm以上的範圍內,可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。 By the maximum value of the peak being present in the range of the wavelength of 460 nm or more, the luminance of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further improved.

藉由所述波峰的極大值存在於波長550nm以下的範圍內,可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的色純度。 By the maximum value of the peak being present in the range of 550 nm or less, the color purity of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further improved.

所述波峰的極大值更佳為存在於波長460nm~540nm的範圍 內,尤佳為存在於波長460nm~520nm的範圍內,進而佳為存在於波長470nm~510nm的範圍內,特佳為存在於波長480nm~500nm的範圍內。 The maximum value of the peak is more preferably in the range of 460 nm to 540 nm. In particular, it is preferably present in the range of 460 nm to 520 nm, and more preferably in the range of 470 nm to 510 nm, and particularly preferably in the range of 480 nm to 500 nm.

另外,所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中的所述波峰的半高寬較佳為80nm~200nm。 Further, the full width at half maximum of the peak in the transmission spectrum of the green filter is preferably from 80 nm to 200 nm.

若所述波峰的半高寬為80nm以上,則可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。 If the full width at half maximum of the peak is 80 nm or more, the brightness of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further increased.

若所述波峰的半高寬為200nm以下,則可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的色純度。 If the full width at half maximum of the peak is 200 nm or less, the color purity of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further improved.

所述波峰的半高寬更佳為80nm~190nm,尤佳為80nm~170nm,特佳為80nm~150nm。 The full width at half maximum of the peak is preferably from 80 nm to 190 nm, more preferably from 80 nm to 170 nm, and particularly preferably from 80 nm to 150 nm.

本發明中,綠色濾光片的透射光譜是指對於測定波長範圍200nm~800nm,使用分光光度計來測定的透射光譜。 In the present invention, the transmission spectrum of the green filter means a transmission spectrum measured by a spectrophotometer for a measurement wavelength range of 200 nm to 800 nm.

分光光度計例如可使用大塚電子(股)製造的分光光度計「MCPD-3700」。 For the spectrophotometer, for example, a spectrophotometer "MCPD-3700" manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd. can be used.

另外,所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中,波長500nm~530nm的範圍內的透射率特佳為90%以上。藉此,可進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。在代替通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物而含有公知的有色材料(例如C.I.顏料綠58、C.I.顏料綠36等)的綠色濾光片中難以達成所述透射率特性。 Further, in the transmission spectrum of the green filter, the transmittance in the wavelength range of 500 nm to 530 nm is particularly preferably 90% or more. Thereby, the brightness of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be further improved. It is difficult to achieve the transmittance characteristics in a green filter containing a known colored material (for example, C.I. Pigment Green 58, C.I. Pigment Green 36, etc.) instead of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1).

藉由綠色濾光片含有後述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物,則更容易地達成所述的綠色濾光片的透射率特性的較佳範圍。 When the green filter contains a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1), a preferable range of the transmittance characteristics of the green filter described above can be more easily achieved.

繼而,參照圖1A~圖1C來對本發明的顯示裝置的實施形態進行說明。其中,本發明的顯示裝置並不限定於以下的實施形態。 Next, an embodiment of a display device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 1C. However, the display device of the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments.

此外,各實施形態中,對於實質上具有相同功能的構件,於所有圖式中賦予相同的符合,存在省略其說明的情況。 In the respective embodiments, members having substantially the same functions are given the same conformity in all the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<第1實施形態> <First embodiment>

圖1A為第1實施形態的顯示裝置(液晶顯示裝置100)的概略構成圖。 FIG. 1A is a schematic configuration diagram of a display device (liquid crystal display device 100) according to the first embodiment.

圖1A所示的液晶顯示裝置100包括:藍色LED 40(一次光源),產生藍色光作為一次光;光轉換構件42(光轉換部),將由藍色LED 40產生的藍色光(箭頭B)轉換為白色光;導光構件46,用以將由光轉換構件42發射出的白色光引導至液晶顯示面板30;以及液晶顯示面板30,具有將由導光構件46發射出的白色光轉換為綠色光的綠色濾光片10G。 The liquid crystal display device 100 shown in FIG. 1A includes a blue LED 40 (primary light source) that generates blue light as primary light, and a light conversion member 42 (light conversion portion) that generates blue light (arrow B) generated by the blue LED 40. Converted to white light; light guiding member 46 for guiding white light emitted by the light converting member 42 to the liquid crystal display panel 30; and liquid crystal display panel 30 having white light for converting the light emitted by the light guiding member 46 into green light Green filter 10G.

液晶顯示裝置100中,於來自藍色LED 40(一次光源)的光程中依次配置有光轉換構件42、導光構件46、以及液晶顯示面板30。 In the liquid crystal display device 100, the light conversion member 42, the light guide member 46, and the liquid crystal display panel 30 are sequentially disposed in the optical path from the blue LED 40 (primary light source).

綠色濾光片10G含有後述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物作為有色材料。 The green filter 10G contains a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1) as a colored material.

圖1A中,將紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光分別以箭頭R、箭頭G、以及箭頭B來表示。 In FIG. 1A, red light, green light, and blue light are respectively indicated by an arrow R, an arrow G, and an arrow B.

該液晶顯示裝置100為側邊緣背光方式的液晶顯示裝置 的例子。 The liquid crystal display device 100 is a liquid crystal display device with a side edge backlight system example of.

液晶顯示裝置100中,詳細而言,液晶顯示面板30包括:帶有彩色濾光片的基板14,於玻璃基板或塑膠基板等透光性基板12上設置紅色濾光片10R、綠色濾光片10G、以及藍色濾光片10B而成;對向基板22,與帶有彩色濾光片的基板14對向而配置;以及液晶層20,設置於帶有彩色濾光片的基板14與對向基板22之間。 In the liquid crystal display device 100, the liquid crystal display panel 30 includes a substrate 14 with a color filter, and a red filter 10R and a green filter on a light-transmissive substrate 12 such as a glass substrate or a plastic substrate. 10G and the blue filter 10B; the opposite substrate 22 is disposed opposite to the substrate 14 with the color filter; and the liquid crystal layer 20 is disposed on the substrate 14 with the color filter and the pair Between the substrates 22 .

關於所述以外的方面,帶有彩色濾光片的基板14可設為公知的構成。因此,雖省略圖示,但帶有彩色濾光片的基板14亦可適當包括黑色矩陣、外塗膜等公知的構成要素。 Regarding the other aspects, the substrate 14 with the color filter can be formed into a known configuration. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted, the substrate 14 with the color filter may appropriately include a known constituent element such as a black matrix or an overcoat film.

對向基板22可使用:於玻璃基板或塑膠基板等透光性基板上設置薄膜電晶體(thin film transistor,TFT)等而成的主動矩陣基板、於玻璃基板或塑膠基板等透光性基板上設置條狀電極等而成的被動矩陣基板等。 The counter substrate 22 can be an active matrix substrate provided with a thin film transistor (TFT) or the like on a light-transmissive substrate such as a glass substrate or a plastic substrate, or a light-transmissive substrate such as a glass substrate or a plastic substrate. A passive matrix substrate or the like which is formed by a strip electrode or the like is provided.

關於所述以外的方面,液晶顯示面板30可設為公知的構成。因此,雖省略圖示,但液晶顯示面板30當然亦可具有偏光板、配向膜、間隔件、密封材料等公知的構件。 Regarding the other aspects, the liquid crystal display panel 30 can be configured as a well-known one. Therefore, although not shown in the drawings, the liquid crystal display panel 30 may of course have a known member such as a polarizing plate, an alignment film, a spacer, and a sealing material.

關於液晶顯示面板的構成,例如可適當參照日本專利特開2013-15812號公報等中記載的公知構成。 For the configuration of the liquid crystal display panel, for example, a known configuration described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2013-15812 or the like can be appropriately referred to.

液晶顯示裝置100包括與液晶顯示面板30的對向基板22對向的導光構件46。 The liquid crystal display device 100 includes a light guiding member 46 that faces the opposite substrate 22 of the liquid crystal display panel 30.

液晶顯示裝置100更包括與該導光構件46的端面對向的光轉 換構件42。 The liquid crystal display device 100 further includes a light turn opposite to an end surface of the light guiding member 46. The member 42 is replaced.

液晶顯示裝置100更包括自光轉換構件42起,配置在與導光構件46相反之側的藍色LED 40。 The liquid crystal display device 100 further includes a blue LED 40 disposed on the side opposite to the light guiding member 46 from the light conversion member 42.

藍色LED 40是產生藍色光作為一次光的一次光源。 The blue LED 40 is a primary light source that generates blue light as primary light.

藍色LED(藍色光)如上所述,在藉由光轉換構件42的紅色光及綠色光的生成效率方面有利。 As described above, the blue LED (blue light) is advantageous in terms of the efficiency of generation of red light and green light by the light conversion member 42.

光轉換構件42是將由藍色LED 40產生的藍色光(一次光)轉換為白色光的構件。 The light conversion member 42 is a member that converts blue light (primary light) generated by the blue LED 40 into white light.

光轉換構件42的構成形成如下構成:在作為黏合劑的樹脂中分散量子點G及量子點R而成的組成物被封入至玻璃製的箱子。 The light conversion member 42 has a configuration in which a composition in which a quantum dot G and a quantum dot R are dispersed in a resin as a binder is sealed in a case made of glass.

此處,量子點G為吸收藍色光(一次光)而發射出綠色光的半導體奈米粒子,量子點R為吸收藍色光(一次光)而發射出紅色光的半導體奈米粒子。量子點的較佳態樣如後述。 Here, the quantum dot G is a semiconductor nanoparticle that emits green light by absorbing blue light (primary light), and the quantum dot R is a semiconductor nanoparticle that emits red light by absorbing blue light (primary light). Preferred aspects of the quantum dots will be described later.

射入至光轉換構件42的藍色光(一次光)的一部分以藍色光(箭頭B)的狀態透射過光轉換構件42,其他的一部分藉由量子點G轉換為綠色光(箭頭G)而由光轉換構件42發射出,進而其他的一部分藉由量子點R轉換為紅色光(箭頭R)而由光轉換構件42發射出。 A part of the blue light (primary light) incident on the light conversion member 42 is transmitted through the light conversion member 42 in the state of blue light (arrow B), and the other portion is converted into green light (arrow G) by the quantum dot G The light conversion member 42 emits, and the other portion is emitted by the light conversion member 42 by the quantum dot R being converted into red light (arrow R).

如上所述,由射入藍色光(一次光)的光轉換構件42發射出包含藍色光、綠色光及紅色光的白色光。 As described above, the light conversion member 42 that emits blue light (primary light) emits white light including blue light, green light, and red light.

由光轉換構件42發射出的白色光與由冷陰極螢光燈或白色LED發射出的白色光相比較,藍色光、綠色光及紅色光的各自的 純度優異。 The white light emitted by the light conversion member 42 is compared with the white light emitted by the cold cathode fluorescent lamp or the white LED, and the respective blue light, green light, and red light Excellent purity.

即,由光轉換構件42發射出的白色光的發光光譜中,存在與藍色光、綠色光及紅色光分別對應的尖銳波峰。綠色光的波峰(發光光譜)的較佳形態如上所述。 That is, in the light emission spectrum of the white light emitted from the light conversion member 42, there are sharp peaks corresponding to the blue light, the green light, and the red light, respectively. The preferred form of the peak (luminescence spectrum) of green light is as described above.

液晶顯示裝置100亦可具備包括藍色LED 40以及光轉換構件42的一種光源構件。 The liquid crystal display device 100 may also be provided with a light source member including the blue LED 40 and the light conversion member 42.

所述光源構件稱為「量子點背光」。 The light source member is referred to as a "quantum dot backlight."

導光構件46是用以將由光轉換構件42發射出的白色光引導至液晶顯示面板30的平板狀構件,是具有作為液晶顯示面板30的面光源的功能的構件。 The light guiding member 46 is a flat member for guiding the white light emitted from the light conversion member 42 to the liquid crystal display panel 30, and has a function as a surface light source of the liquid crystal display panel 30.

雖省略圖示,但導光構件46的構成形成如下構成,所述構成包括:導光板,自端面接收光,且自上表面以及下表面發射出該光;稜鏡板,配置於導光板的上表面;以及反射片,配置於與導光板的下表面的對向。藉由所述構成,可僅自導光構件46的上表面發射出白色光。 Although not shown in the drawings, the light guide member 46 has a configuration including a light guide plate that receives light from the end surface and emits the light from the upper surface and the lower surface; the raft is disposed on the light guide plate a surface; and a reflective sheet disposed opposite to the lower surface of the light guide plate. With the above configuration, white light can be emitted only from the upper surface of the light guiding member 46.

關於導光構件46的構成,例如可適當參照日本專利特開2013-15812號公報等中記載的公知構成。 For the configuration of the light guiding member 46, for example, a known configuration described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2013-15812 or the like can be referred to.

液晶顯示裝置100亦可具備包括藍色LED 40、光轉換構件42、以及導光構件46的一種構件(量子點背光單元)。 The liquid crystal display device 100 may be provided with one member (quantum dot backlight unit) including the blue LED 40, the light conversion member 42, and the light guiding member 46.

量子點背光單元例如可列舉市售的液晶顯示裝置(索尼(SONY)公司製造,商品名KDL46W900A)的背光單元。該背光單元包括藍色LED及Color IQTM(美國量子點圖像(QD Vision) 公司製造的量子點構件)(參照後述的實施例1)。 The quantum dot backlight unit is, for example, a backlight unit of a commercially available liquid crystal display device (manufactured by Sony Corporation, trade name KDL46W900A). The backlight unit includes a blue LED and Color IQ TM (U.S. quantum dots quantum dot image member (QD Vision) Co., Ltd.) (refer to Example 1).

以上所說明的液晶顯示裝置100中,來自藍色LED 40的藍色光(一次光)射入至光轉換構件42,由射入藍色光(一次光)的光轉換構件42發射出白色光(包含紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光的白色光),由光轉換構件42發射出的白色光自導光構件46的端面射入至導光構件46內。射入至導光構件46內的白色光自導光構件46的上表面(與液晶顯示面板對向的面)發射出。所發射出的白色光射入至液晶顯示面板30內,然後,自紅色濾光片10R、綠色濾光片10G、以及藍色濾光片10B中,分別作為紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光而發射出。所發射出的紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光被視認為彩色圖像。 In the liquid crystal display device 100 described above, blue light (primary light) from the blue LED 40 is incident on the light conversion member 42, and white light is emitted from the light conversion member 42 that is incident on the blue light (primary light) (including The white light emitted from the light conversion member 42 is incident on the light guide member 46 from the end surface of the light guide member 46 in the red light, the green light, and the white light of the blue light. The white light incident into the light guiding member 46 is emitted from the upper surface (the surface facing the liquid crystal display panel) of the light guiding member 46. The emitted white light is incident into the liquid crystal display panel 30, and then, as the red light, the green light, and the blue light, from the red color filter 10R, the green color filter 10G, and the blue color filter 10B, respectively. And fired out. The emitted red light, green light, and blue light are regarded as color images.

液晶顯示裝置100包含含有量子點G的光轉換構件42、與含有後述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的綠色濾光片10G的組合。此處,如上所述,光轉換構件42的圖像中的綠色光的亮度提高的效果優異,且綠色濾光片10G的由量子點G發射出的綠色光的波長區域的透射率高。 The liquid crystal display device 100 includes a combination of a light conversion member 42 including a quantum dot G and a green filter 10G containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1). Here, as described above, the effect of improving the luminance of the green light in the image of the light conversion member 42 is excellent, and the transmittance of the wavelength region of the green light emitted from the quantum dot G of the green color filter 10G is high.

因此,於液晶顯示裝置100中,更顯著地獲得藉由量子點G帶來的綠色光的亮度提高的效果,因此可顯著提高透射過綠色濾光片10G之後的綠色光的亮度。進而,藉由使用量子點G,透射過綠色濾光片10G之後的綠色光的色純度亦可顯著提高。 Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 100, the effect of improving the luminance of the green light by the quantum dot G is more remarkable, and thus the luminance of the green light after being transmitted through the green color filter 10G can be remarkably improved. Further, by using the quantum dot G, the color purity of the green light after being transmitted through the green color filter 10G can be remarkably improved.

進而,液晶顯示裝置100由於使用藍色LED 40作為一次光源,故而透射過藍色濾光片10B之後的藍色光的亮度以及色純度 高。進而,液晶顯示裝置100由於光轉換構件42含有量子點R,故而透射過紅色濾光片10R之後的紅色光的亮度以及色純度高。 Further, since the liquid crystal display device 100 uses the blue LED 40 as a primary light source, the luminance and color purity of the blue light after being transmitted through the blue color filter 10B high. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 100, since the light conversion member 42 contains the quantum dot R, the luminance and color purity of the red light transmitted through the red color filter 10R are high.

因此,藉由液晶顯示裝置100,可顯示綠色光、紅色光、以及藍色光的各自的亮度以及色純度高的圖像(即,圖像整體的亮度以及色再現性優異的圖像)。 Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 100 can display an image having high luminance and high color purity of green light, red light, and blue light (that is, an image excellent in luminance and color reproducibility of the entire image).

液晶顯示裝置100除了包括所述構件以外,亦可適當包括作為液晶顯示裝置用的構件而公知的構件。 The liquid crystal display device 100 may include a member known as a member for a liquid crystal display device, in addition to the member.

<第2實施形態> <Second embodiment>

圖1B是第2實施形態的顯示裝置(液晶顯示裝置200)的概略構成圖。 FIG. 1B is a schematic configuration diagram of a display device (liquid crystal display device 200) according to the second embodiment.

液晶顯示裝置200的構成除了在液晶顯示裝置100中不設置光轉換構件42,且於導光構件46與液晶顯示面板30之間配置有作為光轉換部的光轉換片52以外,與液晶顯示裝置100的構成相同。 In the liquid crystal display device 200, the liquid crystal display device 100 is not provided with the light conversion member 42, and the light conversion sheet 52 as the light conversion portion is disposed between the light guide member 46 and the liquid crystal display panel 30, and the liquid crystal display device. The composition of 100 is the same.

液晶顯示裝置200中,光轉換片52未圖示,但包括分散有量子點G及量子點R的樹脂層、以及保護該樹脂層的兩面的一對保護膜。即,光轉換片52為量子點片(QDEF)。 In the liquid crystal display device 200, the light conversion sheet 52 is not shown, but includes a resin layer in which the quantum dots G and the quantum dots R are dispersed, and a pair of protective films that protect both surfaces of the resin layer. That is, the light conversion sheet 52 is a quantum dot sheet (QDEF).

量子點G及量子點R是與液晶顯示裝置100中的量子點G及量子點R相同的半導體奈米粒子。 The quantum dot G and the quantum dot R are the same semiconductor nanoparticles as the quantum dot G and the quantum dot R in the liquid crystal display device 100.

由光轉換片52發射出的白色光與由冷陰極螢光燈或白色LED發射出的白色光相比較,藍色光、綠色光及紅色光的各自的純度優異。 The white light emitted from the light conversion sheet 52 is superior to the white light emitted from the cold cathode fluorescent lamp or the white LED, and each of the blue light, the green light, and the red light is excellent in purity.

即,由光轉換片52發射出的白色光的光譜中,存在與藍色光、綠色光及紅色光分別對應的尖銳波峰。關於綠色光的波峰的較佳形態如上所述。 That is, in the spectrum of the white light emitted from the light conversion sheet 52, there are sharp peaks corresponding to the respective blue light, green light, and red light. The preferred form of the peak of green light is as described above.

該液晶顯示裝置200亦與液晶顯示裝置100同樣地,為側邊緣背光方式的液晶顯示裝置的例子。 Similarly to the liquid crystal display device 100, the liquid crystal display device 200 is an example of a liquid crystal display device of a side edge backlight system.

其中,液晶顯示裝置200中,來自藍色LED 40的藍色光(一次光)直接射入至導光構件46的端面,自導光構件46的上表面並不發射出白色光,而是發射出藍色光,所發射出的藍色光藉由光轉換片52轉換為白色光(包含紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光的白色光),經轉換的白色光射入至液晶顯示面板30。就該些方面而言,液晶顯示裝置200與液晶顯示裝置100不同。 In the liquid crystal display device 200, the blue light (primary light) from the blue LED 40 is directly incident on the end surface of the light guiding member 46, and the upper surface of the light guiding member 46 does not emit white light, but is emitted. In the blue light, the emitted blue light is converted into white light (white light including red light, green light, and blue light) by the light conversion sheet 52, and the converted white light is incident on the liquid crystal display panel 30. In these respects, the liquid crystal display device 200 is different from the liquid crystal display device 100.

射入至液晶顯示面板30的白色光與液晶顯示裝置100的情況同樣地,成為紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光而由液晶顯示面板30發射出,所發射出的紅色光、綠色光、以及藍色光與液晶顯示裝置100的情況同樣地,被視認為彩色圖像。 Similarly to the case of the liquid crystal display device 100, the white light incident on the liquid crystal display panel 30 is red light, green light, and blue light, and is emitted by the liquid crystal display panel 30, and the emitted red light, green light, and The blue light is regarded as a color image as in the case of the liquid crystal display device 100.

該液晶顯示裝置200亦與液晶顯示裝置100同樣地,包含量子點G、與含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的綠色濾光片的組合,進而包含藍色LED及量子點R。 Similarly to the liquid crystal display device 100, the liquid crystal display device 200 includes a combination of a quantum dot G and a green filter containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1), and further includes a blue LED and a quantum dot R.

因此,液晶顯示裝置200亦發揮與液晶顯示裝置100相同的效果。 Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 200 also exhibits the same effects as the liquid crystal display device 100.

<第3實施形態> <Third embodiment>

圖1C是第3實施形態的顯示裝置(液晶顯示裝置300)的概 略構成圖。 1C is a schematic diagram of a display device (liquid crystal display device 300) according to a third embodiment. Slightly composed.

液晶顯示裝置300的構成除了於液晶顯示裝置200中,將藍色LED 40以及導光構件46變更為直下式藍色LED單元62以外,與液晶顯示裝置200的構成相同。 The configuration of the liquid crystal display device 300 is the same as that of the liquid crystal display device 200 except that the blue LED 40 and the light guiding member 46 are changed to the direct blue LED unit 62 in the liquid crystal display device 200.

液晶顯示裝置300中,直下式藍色LED單元62包括:殼體61、及配置於殼體61內的多個藍色LED 60。 In the liquid crystal display device 300, the direct type blue LED unit 62 includes a case 61 and a plurality of blue LEDs 60 disposed in the case 61.

直下式藍色LED單元62自光轉換片52起配置於與液晶顯示面板30相反之側,且以多個藍色LED 60與光轉換片52對向的方式配置。藉此,不經由導光構件,可自液晶顯示面板30的法線方向照射藍色光(一次光)。 The direct-type blue LED unit 62 is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid crystal display panel 30 from the light conversion sheet 52, and is disposed such that the plurality of blue LEDs 60 and the light conversion sheet 52 face each other. Thereby, blue light (primary light) can be irradiated from the normal direction of the liquid crystal display panel 30 without passing through the light guiding member.

液晶顯示裝置300中,由多個藍色LED 60產生的藍色光藉由光轉換片52轉換為包含藍色光、綠色光及紅色光的白色光,經轉換的白色光射入至液晶顯示面板30。 In the liquid crystal display device 300, the blue light generated by the plurality of blue LEDs 60 is converted into white light including blue light, green light, and red light by the light conversion sheet 52, and the converted white light is incident on the liquid crystal display panel 30. .

該液晶顯示裝置300為直下式背光方式的液晶顯示裝置的例子。 This liquid crystal display device 300 is an example of a liquid crystal display device of a direct type backlight system.

除了所述方面以外,包含直下式藍色LED單元62而為直下式背光方式的液晶顯示裝置的構成可設為公知的構成。 In addition to the above, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device including the direct type blue LED unit 62 and the direct type backlight system can be a known configuration.

該液晶顯示裝置300亦與液晶顯示裝置100同樣地,包含量子點G、與含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的綠色濾光片的組合,進而包含藍色LED及量子點R。 Similarly to the liquid crystal display device 100, the liquid crystal display device 300 includes a combination of a quantum dot G and a green filter containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1), and further includes a blue LED and a quantum dot R.

因此,液晶顯示裝置300亦發揮與液晶顯示裝置100相同的效果。 Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 300 also exhibits the same effects as those of the liquid crystal display device 100.

以上,已對本發明的第1實施形態~第3實施形態進行了說明,但本發明並不限定於該些實施形態。 Although the first embodiment to the third embodiment of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments.

例如,所述實施形態中的光轉換部亦可變更為配置於液晶顯示面板內的包含量子點R及量子點G的光轉換層。關於配置於液晶顯示面板內的光轉換層,例如可參照日本專利特開2013-15812號公報等中記載的構成。 For example, the light conversion unit in the above embodiment may be changed to a light conversion layer including quantum dots R and quantum dots G disposed in the liquid crystal display panel. For the light conversion layer to be disposed in the liquid crystal display panel, for example, the configuration described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2013-15812 or the like can be referred to.

另外,可將所述實施形態中的液晶顯示面板置換為包括紅色濾光片10R、綠色濾光片10G、以及藍色濾光片10B的有機電致發光(有機EL)顯示面板。即,本發明的顯示裝置可為有機EL顯示裝置。 Further, the liquid crystal display panel in the above embodiment can be replaced with an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) display panel including the red color filter 10R, the green color filter 10G, and the blue color filter 10B. That is, the display device of the present invention may be an organic EL display device.

其中,於本發明的顯示裝置為包括具有所述綠色濾光片的液晶顯示面板的液晶顯示裝置的情況(例如為第1實施形態~第3實施形態的情況)下,不僅為液晶顯示裝置,而且可顯示與有機EL顯示裝置相當的程度的亮度以及色再現性優異的圖像。 In the case where the display device of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display panel having the green filter (for example, in the case of the first embodiment to the third embodiment), it is not only a liquid crystal display device. Further, an image excellent in brightness and color reproducibility comparable to the organic EL display device can be displayed.

繼而,對本發明的顯示裝置的各構件進行說明。 Next, each member of the display device of the present invention will be described.

<一次光源> <primary light source>

本發明中的一次光源是發射出一次光的光源。 The primary light source in the present invention is a light source that emits primary light.

一次光源除了所述的藍色LED以外,亦可使用紫外線LED、紅色LED、綠色LED等其他的LED。 In addition to the blue LED described above, the primary light source may use other LEDs such as an ultraviolet LED, a red LED, and a green LED.

LED在低電力、小型、低成本等方面具有大的優點。 LEDs have great advantages in terms of low power, small size, and low cost.

LED中,就藉由光轉換部的光轉換的效率方面而言,較佳為藍色LED以及紫外線LED。 Among the LEDs, blue LEDs and ultraviolet LEDs are preferred in terms of efficiency of light conversion by the light converting portion.

其中,藍色LED亦具有可減少光轉換部中可含有的螢光體的種類的優點。例如,於使用藍色LED作為一次光源,利用光轉換部將由藍色LED發射出的一次光(藍色光)轉換為白色光的情況下,光轉換部只要含有將藍色光轉換為綠色光的量子點以及將藍色光轉換為紅色光的無機螢光體即可。該情況下,由藍色LED產生的藍色光的一部分藉由直接通過光轉換部而以藍色光的狀態來利用。 Among them, the blue LED also has an advantage of reducing the type of the phosphor that can be contained in the light conversion portion. For example, when a blue LED is used as a primary light source and a primary light (blue light) emitted from a blue LED is converted into white light by a light conversion unit, the light conversion unit includes a quantum that converts blue light into green light. Points and inorganic phosphors that convert blue light into red light. In this case, a part of the blue light generated by the blue LED is used in a state of blue light by directly passing through the light conversion unit.

<光轉換部> <Light Conversion Unit>

本發明中的光轉換部含有吸收由一次光源發射出的一次光的至少一部分而發射出綠色光的量子點G。光轉換部可視需要而含有其他的無機螢光體(具體例如後述)。 The light conversion portion in the present invention includes a quantum dot G that absorbs at least a part of the primary light emitted from the primary light source and emits green light. The light conversion unit may contain other inorganic phosphors as needed (specifically, for example, described later).

光轉換部較佳為如上所述,含有吸收由一次光源發射出的一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的無機螢光體(較佳為吸收由一次光源發射出的一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的量子點R)。 Preferably, the light converting portion includes an inorganic phosphor that absorbs a part of the primary light emitted from the primary light source and emits red light (preferably, absorbs a part of the primary light emitted by the primary light source and emits the light as described above). The quantum point of red light R).

另外,光轉換部亦可如上所述,含有吸收由一次光源發射出的一次光的一部分而發射出藍色光的無機螢光體(較佳為吸收由一次光源發射出的一次光的一部分而發射出藍色光的量子點B)。其中,於一次光為藍色光的情況下,不需要發射出藍色光的螢光體。 Further, as described above, the light converting portion may include an inorganic phosphor that absorbs a part of the primary light emitted from the primary light source and emits blue light (preferably, absorbs a part of the primary light emitted by the primary light source and emits a quantum dot of blue light B). Among them, in the case where the primary light is blue light, it is not necessary to emit a blue light fluorescent body.

此處,對本發明中的量子點(量子點G、以及視需要而使用的量子點R及量子點B)進行說明。 Here, the quantum dots (quantum dots G and, if necessary, quantum dots R and quantum dots B) in the present invention will be described.

所謂量子點,是指具有量子封入效果(quantum confinement effect)的半導體奈米粒子。 The so-called quantum dot refers to the quantum encapsulation effect (quantum confinement) Semiconductor nanoparticle.

量子點(半導體奈米粒子)的粒徑通常在1nm~10nm的範圍內。 The particle diameter of the quantum dot (semiconductor nanoparticle) is usually in the range of 1 nm to 10 nm.

量子點若自激發源吸收光而達到能量激發狀態,則發射出相當於量子點的能量帶間隙(energy band gap)的能量。因此,若調節量子點的尺寸或者物質的組成,則可調節能量帶間隙,可獲得多種水準的波長帶的能量。 When a quantum dot absorbs light from an excitation source and reaches an energy excitation state, it emits energy equivalent to an energy band gap of a quantum dot. Therefore, if the size of the quantum dots or the composition of the substance is adjusted, the energy band gap can be adjusted, and energy of a plurality of levels of wavelength bands can be obtained.

例如,量子點於量子點的粒徑為5.5nm~10nm的情況下發出紅色光,於量子點的粒徑為2.5nm~5nm的情況下發出綠色光,於量子點的粒徑為1nm~2nm的情況下發出藍色光。發出黃色光的量子點具有發出紅色的量子點與發出綠色的量子點的中間尺寸。 For example, when the quantum dot has a particle diameter of 5.5 nm to 10 nm, the quantum dot emits red light, and when the quantum dot has a particle diameter of 2.5 nm to 5 nm, green light is emitted, and the quantum dot has a particle diameter of 1 nm to 2 nm. In the case of blue light. Quantum dots that emit yellow light have an intermediate dimension that emits red quantum dots and green quantum dots.

其中,所述粒徑中可存在若干的變動。 Therein, there may be some variation in the particle size.

此處,發出紅色光的量子點為所述的量子點R,發出綠色光的量子點為所述的量子點G,發出藍色光的量子點為所述的量子點B。 Here, the quantum dot emitting red light is the quantum dot R, the quantum dot emitting green light is the quantum dot G, and the quantum dot emitting blue light is the quantum dot B.

由所述的量子點,可藉由量子尺寸效果(quantum size effect)而容易獲得紅色光、綠色光、藍色光等多種顏色的光。因此,亦可製作以各種波長來發光的顏色,亦可將紅色、綠色、藍色混合而生成.實現白色或者多種顏色。 From the quantum dots described above, light of a plurality of colors such as red light, green light, and blue light can be easily obtained by a quantum size effect. Therefore, colors that emit light at various wavelengths can also be produced, and red, green, and blue can be mixed to generate. Achieve white or multiple colors.

例如,於由一次光源發射出的光為藍色光的情況下,光轉換部較佳為含有量子點R及量子點G。 For example, when the light emitted from the primary light source is blue light, the light conversion unit preferably includes the quantum dot R and the quantum dot G.

量子點R將藍色光的一部分轉換為600nm~750nm(較佳為600nm~670nm)的波長的紅色光,量子點G將藍色光的一部分轉換為495nm~570nm的波長的綠色光。而且,未轉換為紅色光以及綠色光的藍色光直接透射過光轉換部。 The quantum dot R converts a part of the blue light into red light having a wavelength of 600 nm to 750 nm (preferably 600 nm to 670 nm), and the quantum dot G converts a part of the blue light into green light having a wavelength of 495 nm to 570 nm. Further, blue light that is not converted into red light and green light is directly transmitted through the light conversion portion.

因此,自光轉換部發射出藍色光、紅色光、綠色光,該些光混合而生成白色光。 Therefore, blue light, red light, and green light are emitted from the light conversion portion, and the light is mixed to generate white light.

另一方面,於由一次光源發射出的光為紅色光的情況下,光轉換部可包含量子點B及量子點G,於由一次光源發射出的光為綠色光的情況下,光轉換部可包含量子點B及量子點R。 On the other hand, in a case where the light emitted from the primary light source is red light, the light conversion portion may include the quantum dot B and the quantum dot G, and in the case where the light emitted by the primary light source is green light, the light conversion portion Quantum dots B and quantum dots R may be included.

另外,於由一次光源發射出的光是不為藍色光、紅色光、綠色光而為其他單色光、紫外線、或者紅外線的情況下,亦可包含光轉換部、量子點R、量子點G、及量子點B的全部,將通過光轉換部的光過濾為藍色、紅色、以及綠色。 In addition, when the light emitted from the primary light source is not blue light, red light, or green light but is other monochromatic light, ultraviolet light, or infrared light, the light conversion portion, the quantum dot R, and the quantum dot G may be included. And all of the quantum dots B, the light passing through the light conversion portion is filtered into blue, red, and green.

其中,就光的轉換的效率方面而言,最佳為一次光源為藍色光,且光轉換部含有量子點R及量子點G的態樣。 Among them, in terms of the efficiency of light conversion, it is preferable that the primary light source is blue light, and the light conversion portion includes the quantum dot R and the quantum dot G.

量子點較佳為包含選自由II-VI族化合物、III-V族化合物、IV-VI族化合物、以及IV族化合物所組成的組群中的至少1種的半導體奈米粒子。 The quantum dot preferably contains at least one semiconductor nanoparticle selected from the group consisting of a II-VI compound, a III-V compound, a IV-VI compound, and a group IV compound.

量子點尤佳為選自下述化合物組群中的至少一種的半導體奈米粒子。 The quantum dot is particularly preferably a semiconductor nanoparticle selected from at least one of the following group of compounds.

-化合物組群- - compound group -

CdSe、CdTe、ZnS、ZnSe、ZnTe、ZnO、HgS、HgSe、HgTe、 CdSeS、CdSeTe、CdSTe、ZnSeS、ZnSeTe、ZnSTe、HgSeS、HgSeTe、HgSTe、CdZnS、CdZnSe、CdZnTe、CdHgS、CdHgSe、CdHgTe、HgZnS、HgZnSe、HgZnTe、CdZnSeS、CdZnSeTe、CdZnSTe、CdHgSeS、CdHgSeTe、CdHgSTe、HgZnSeS、HgZnSeTe、HgZnSTe(以上為「II-VI族化合物」)、GaN、GaP、GaAs、GaSb、AlN、AlP、AlAs、AlSb、InN、InP、InAs、InSb、GaNP、GaNAs、GaNSb、GaPAs、GaPSb、AlNP、AlNAs、AlNSb、AlPAs、AlPSb、InNP、InNAs、InNSb、InPAs、InPSb、GaAlNP、GaAlNAs、GaAlNSb、GaAlPAs、GaAlPSb、GaInNP、GaInNAs、GaInNSb、GaInPAs、GaInPSb、InAlNP、InAlNAs、InAlNSb、InAlPAs、InAlPSb(以上為「III-V族化合物」)、SnS、SnSe、SnTe、PbS、PbSe、PbTe、SnSeS、SnSeTe、SnSTe、PbSeS、PbSeTe、PbSTe、SnPbS、SnPbSe、SnPbTe、SnPbSSe、SnPbSeTe、SnPbSTe(以上為「IV-VI族化合物」)、Si、Ge、SiC、SiGe(以上為「IV族化合物」)。 CdSe, CdTe, ZnS, ZnSe, ZnTe, ZnO, HgS, HgSe, HgTe, CdSeS, CdSeTe, CdSTe, ZnSeS, ZnSeTe, ZnSTe, HgSeS, HgSeTe, HgSTe, CdZnS, CdZnSe, CdZnTe, CdHgS, CdHgSe, CdHgTe, HgZnS, HgZnSe, HgZnTe, CdZnSeS, CdZnSeTe, CdZnSTe, CdHgSeS, CdHgSeTe, CdHgSTe, HgZnSeS, HgZnSeTe, HgZnSTe (above "II-VI compound"), GaN, GaP, GaAs, GaSb, AlN, AlP, AlAs, AlSb, InN, InP, InAs, InSb, GaN, GaNAs, GaNSb, GaPAs, GaPSb, AlNP , AlNAs, AlNSb, AlPAs, AlPSb, InNP, InNAs, InNSb, InPAs, InPSb, GaAlNP, GaAlNAs, GaAlNSb, GaAlPAs, GaAlPSb, GaInNP, GaInNAs, GaInNSb, GaInPAs, GaInPSb, InAlNP, InAlNAs, InAlNSb, InAlPAs, InAlPSb (above "III-V compound"), SnS, SnSe, SnTe, PbS, PbSe, PbTe, SnSeS, SnSeTe, SnSTe, PbSeS, PbSeTe, PbSTe, SnPbS, SnPbSe, SnPbTe, SnPbSSe, SnPbSeTe, SnPbSTe (above "IV -VI compound"), Si, Ge, SiC, SiGe (above "Group IV compound").

量子點可利用化學性濕式方法來合成。 Quantum dots can be synthesized using chemical wet methods.

化學性濕式方法是於有機溶劑中加入前驅物物質而使粒子成長的方法。 The chemical wet method is a method in which a precursor substance is added to an organic solvent to grow the particles.

另外,量子點亦可具有核.殼結構。 In addition, quantum dots can also have a core. Shell structure.

於作為量子點的半導體奈米粒子的表面可存在有機配位體。 An organic ligand may exist on the surface of the semiconductor nanoparticle as a quantum dot.

有機配位體包含吡啶、巰基醇、硫醇、膦、以及氧化膦等,合成後發揮使不穩定的量子點穩定化的作用。 The organic ligand includes pyridine, mercapto alcohol, thiol, phosphine, and phosphine oxide, and functions to stabilize unstable quantum dots after synthesis.

光轉換部除了含有量子點(至少量子點G)以外,亦可含有其他的無機螢光體。 The light conversion unit may contain other inorganic phosphors in addition to quantum dots (at least the quantum dots G).

其他的無機螢光體可列舉:釔鋁石榴石(yttrium aluminum garnet,YAG)系螢光體、鋱鋁石榴石(terbium aluminum garnet,TAG)系螢光體、矽鋁氮氧化物(sialon)系螢光體、正矽酸鋇(barium orthosilicate,BOS)系螢光體等。 Examples of other inorganic phosphors include a yttrium aluminum garnet (YAG)-based phosphor, a terbium aluminum garnet (TAG)-based phosphor, and a sialon-based sialon system. A phosphor or a barium orthosilicate (BOS)-based phosphor.

光轉換部可含有樹脂。 The light conversion portion may contain a resin.

光轉換部的較佳形態是於樹脂中分散有量子點的形態。 A preferred embodiment of the light conversion unit is a form in which quantum dots are dispersed in a resin.

樹脂較佳為使用不吸收一次光的物質。 The resin is preferably one which does not absorb primary light.

更具體而言,樹脂較佳為使用選自由環氧系樹脂、矽酮系樹脂、丙烯酸系樹脂、以及碳酸酯系高分子所組成的組群中的至少一種。 More specifically, the resin is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of an epoxy resin, an anthrone resin, an acrylic resin, and a carbonate polymer.

於樹脂具有彈性的情況下,亦可提高顯示裝置對外部衝擊的耐久性。 In the case where the resin has elasticity, the durability of the display device against external impact can also be improved.

另外,光轉換部除了含有樹脂以外,亦可含有玻璃。 Further, the light conversion unit may contain glass in addition to the resin.

光轉換部的具體形態可列舉:於玻璃箱等透光性的容器中收納分散有量子點(以及視需要的其他無機螢光體)的樹脂而成的光轉換構件(例如所述光轉換構件42)、包含分散有量子點(以及視需要的其他無機螢光體)的樹脂的光轉換層、包含所述光轉換層及被覆該光轉換層的兩面的透光性保護膜的光轉換片(量子點片;例如所述光轉換片52)等。 Specific examples of the light-converting member include a light-converting member in which a resin in which quantum dots (and other inorganic phosphors as needed) are dispersed in a translucent container such as a glass case (for example, the light-converting member) 42) a light conversion layer containing a resin in which quantum dots (and other inorganic phosphors as needed) are dispersed, and a light conversion sheet including the light conversion layer and a light transmissive protective film covering both surfaces of the light conversion layer (Quantum dot; for example, the light conversion sheet 52).

形成所述光轉換層的方法可列舉:利用公知的成形方法將分 散有量子點(以及視需要的其他無機螢光體)的樹脂成形的方法、將含有分散有量子點(以及視需要的其他無機螢光體)的樹脂以及有機溶劑的塗佈液塗佈於支持體(所述保護膜等)上並使其乾燥的方法等。 The method of forming the light conversion layer may be exemplified by using a well-known molding method. A method of resin molding in which quantum dots (and other inorganic phosphors as needed) are dispersed, and a coating liquid containing a resin in which quantum dots (and other inorganic phosphors as needed) and an organic solvent are dispersed is applied to A method of drying a support (the protective film or the like) and the like.

<綠色濾光片> <green filter>

綠色濾光片含有至少1種下述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物作為有色材料。 The green filter contains at least one phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1) as a colored material.

綠色濾光片亦可視需要而含有其他有色材料、或有色材料以外的成分。 The green filter may also contain other colored materials or components other than the colored materials as needed.

<通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物> <phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1)>

下述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物是由量子點G發射出的綠色光的透射率高的染料。更詳細而言,所述酞菁化合物是容易達成所述較佳的透射率特性的染料。推測其原因在於:於酞菁骨架上取代有鹵素原子、及包含芳香環結構的特定基團(下述通式(2)或通式(3)所表示的基團)的結構。 The phthalocyanine compound represented by the following general formula (1) is a dye having a high transmittance of green light emitted from the quantum dot G. In more detail, the phthalocyanine compound is a dye that easily achieves the above-described preferred transmittance characteristics. The reason for this is presumed to be a structure in which a halogen atom and a specific group containing an aromatic ring structure (a group represented by the following general formula (2) or the general formula (3)) are substituted on the phthalocyanine skeleton.

因此,藉由綠色濾光片含有下述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物作為有色材料,且光轉換部含有量子點G,可提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度。 Therefore, the green filter contains a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1) as a colored material, and the light conversion portion contains the quantum dots G, whereby the luminance of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter can be improved.

另外,含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的著色組成物(綠色濾光片形成用的組成物)不僅製備著色組成物時的所述酞菁化合物對於有機溶劑的溶解性良好,將著色組成物以液狀態保管時、或者將著色組成物於基板上形成著色膜的狀態時的因經時而 引起的染料等的析出亦不存在,保存穩定性良好,而且耐熱性及耐光性良好。進而,所述著色組成物的圖案形成性亦優異。 In addition, the coloring composition (the composition for forming a green filter) containing the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) is excellent in the solubility of the phthalocyanine compound in an organic solvent when the coloring composition is prepared. When the colored composition is stored in a liquid state or when the colored composition forms a colored film on the substrate, the time is The precipitation of the dye or the like does not occur, the storage stability is good, and the heat resistance and light resistance are good. Further, the coloring composition is also excellent in pattern formability.

通式(1)中,存在多個的X分別獨立地表示鹵素原子。存在多個的R1分別獨立地表示下述通式(2)或通式(3)所表示的基團。存在多個的R分別獨立地表示氫原子或者1價取代基。M表示Cu、Zn、V(=O)、Mg、Ni、Ti(=O)、Sn、或者Si。多個a分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個n分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個r分別獨立地表示0~4的整數。其中,多個a中至少1個為1以上,多個n中至少1個為1以上。當然,於多個n的總和為1的情況下,X亦表示鹵素原子。於多個a的總和為1的情況下,R1亦表示下述通式(2)或通式(3)所表示的基團。於多個r的總和為1的情況下,R亦表示氫原子或者1價取代基。多個 a、多個n與多個r的總和為16。 In the general formula (1), a plurality of X atoms independently represent a halogen atom. A plurality of R 1 are each independently represented by a group represented by the following formula (2) or (3). A plurality of R's independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. M represents Cu, Zn, V(=O), Mg, Ni, Ti(=O), Sn, or Si. The plurality of a each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and the plurality of n independently represent integers of 0 to 4, and the plurality of r independently represent integers of 0 to 4, respectively. Among them, at least one of the plurality of a is 1 or more, and at least one of the plurality of n is 1 or more. Of course, in the case where the sum of a plurality of n is 1, X also represents a halogen atom. When the total of a plurality of a is 1, the R 1 also represents a group represented by the following formula (2) or (3). In the case where the total of a plurality of r is 1, R also represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. The sum of a plurality of a, a plurality of n, and a plurality of r is 16.

通式(2)及通式(3)中,存在b個的R2分別獨立地表示選自由下述通式(4)~通式(6)所組成的組群中的1價取代基。R3表示1價取代基。b表示1~5的整數,c表示0~4的整數。其中,通式(2)中,b與c的合計不會超過5。Y表示-O-、-S-、-SO2-、或者-NR8-。R8表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基。 In the general formulae (2) and (3), b of R 2 each independently represents a monovalent substituent selected from the group consisting of the following general formulae (4) to (6). R 3 represents a monovalent substituent. b represents an integer from 1 to 5, and c represents an integer from 0 to 4. However, in the general formula (2), the total of b and c does not exceed 5. Y represents -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -NR 8 -. R 8 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.

通式(4)中,R4表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的氧烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的 烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的芳基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基。通式(5)中,d表示0~2的整數,於d為0或1的情況下,R5表示可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基,於d為2的情況下,R5表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基。通式(6)中,R6表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基羰基、可具有取代基的芳基羰基、可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基,R7表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基。 In the formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an oxyalkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, and may have A dialkylamino group of a substituent, an arylamine group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent. In the formula (5), d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and wherein d is 2 In the case, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or may have a substituent Alkylarylamino group. In the formula (6), R 6 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, and an alkyl group which may have a substituent A sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and R 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.

於本發明所使用的通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物為2種以上的混合物的情況下,a、n、r分別是指混合物中的化合物的平均值。 When the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) used in the present invention is a mixture of two or more kinds, a, n, and r each represent an average value of the compounds in the mixture.

雖進行了很多使用酞菁化合物作為彩色濾光片的著色物的研究(參照日本專利第3476208號、國際公開2011/105603號小冊子),但未獲得具有特別是作為綠色的彩色濾光片用著色組成物而令人滿意的色純度及透射率,進而滿足耐熱性、耐光性、硬化感度、經時的保存穩定性的著色組成物。就所述觀點而言,本發明的意義大。 Although many studies have been conducted on the use of phthalocyanine compounds as color filters for color filters (refer to Japanese Patent No. 3476208 and International Publication No. 2011/105603), coloring for color filters having green color in particular has not been obtained. A coloring composition having satisfactory color purity and transmittance, and further satisfying heat resistance, light resistance, hardening sensitivity, and storage stability over time. From the standpoint of the above, the meaning of the present invention is large.

另外,本發明所使用的酞菁化合物較佳為550nm下的吸收強度與650nm下的吸收強度的比(550nm/650nm)在0~0.2的範 圍內,尤佳為在0~0.1的範圍內。 Further, the phthalocyanine compound used in the present invention preferably has a ratio of absorption intensity at 550 nm to absorption intensity at 650 nm (550 nm / 650 nm) in the range of 0 to 0.2. In the area, it is especially in the range of 0~0.1.

通式(1)中,X表示鹵素原子,較佳為氯原子或者溴原子,更佳為氯原子。另外,若X的取代位置為酞菁骨架的α位,則吸收波長進行長波化,可適合用於綠色的彩色濾光片用途。 In the formula (1), X represents a halogen atom, preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and more preferably a chlorine atom. Further, when the substitution position of X is the α position of the phthalocyanine skeleton, the absorption wavelength is long-wavelength, and it can be suitably used for green color filter applications.

多個n分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,較佳為2~4的整數。多個n的合計較佳為2~15,更佳為6~15,特佳為9~15。 The plurality of n independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and preferably an integer of 2 to 4. The total of a plurality of n is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 6 to 15, and particularly preferably 9 to 15.

R1表示通式(2)或通式(3)所表示的基團,更佳為通式(2)所表示的基團。 R 1 represents a group represented by the formula (2) or the formula (3), and more preferably a group represented by the formula (2).

若R1的取代位置為酞菁骨架的β位,則可於彩色濾光片的著色層內維持酞菁骨架的適度的締合,容易賦予所述的吸收強度比,故而較佳。另外,若R1的取代位置為酞菁骨架的α位,則著色組成物中的酞菁化合物的析出得到抑制,著色組成物的保存穩定性提高,故而較佳。 When the substitution position of R 1 is the β position of the phthalocyanine skeleton, it is preferable to maintain an appropriate association of the phthalocyanine skeleton in the coloring layer of the color filter and to easily provide the above-described absorption intensity ratio. In addition, when the substitution position of R 1 is the α position of the phthalocyanine skeleton, precipitation of the phthalocyanine compound in the colored composition is suppressed, and storage stability of the colored composition is improved, which is preferable.

多個a分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,較佳為0或1。多個a的合計較佳為1~14,特佳為1~8,尤佳為1~5。 The plurality of a independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1. The total of a plurality of a is preferably from 1 to 14, particularly preferably from 1 to 8, and particularly preferably from 1 to 5.

M表示Cu、Zn、V(=O)、Mg、Ni、Ti(=O)、Sn、或者Si,較佳為Zn、或者Cu。 M represents Cu, Zn, V(=O), Mg, Ni, Ti(=O), Sn, or Si, preferably Zn or Cu.

R表示氫原子或者1價取代基。1價取代基的例子可例示後述的取代基T。R較佳為氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、芳基、或者芳氧基,更佳為氫原子、碳數1~3的烷基、碳數1~3的烷氧基、苯氧基,尤佳為氫原子。 R represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. The substituent T which will be described later can be exemplified as an example of the monovalent substituent. R is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group or an aryloxy group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a phenoxy group. Especially good for hydrogen atoms.

多個r分別獨立地表示0~4的整數。 The plurality of r independently represent integers of 0 to 4, respectively.

通式(1)中,酞菁骨架中的R的取代位置可為酞菁骨架的α位、β位的任一者,但α位取代體的抑制分子締合的效果大,在提高著色層的吸光係數的方面較佳。 In the general formula (1), the substitution position of R in the phthalocyanine skeleton may be any of the α-position and the β-position of the phthalocyanine skeleton, but the effect of inhibiting the association of the α-position substituent is large, and the colored layer is improved. The aspect of the absorption coefficient is preferred.

通式(2)及通式(3)中的R2分別獨立地表示選自由通式(4)~通式(6)所組成的組群中的1價取代基,特佳為通式(4)或通式(5)所表示的1價取代基。 R 2 in the general formula (2) and the general formula (3) each independently represents a monovalent substituent selected from the group consisting of the general formulae (4) to (6), and particularly preferably a general formula ( 4) or a monovalent substituent represented by the formula (5).

b為1~5的整數,較佳為1或2。於b為2以上的情況下,存在多個的R2可相同,亦可不同。 b is an integer of 1 to 5, preferably 1 or 2. When b is 2 or more, a plurality of R 2 may be the same or different.

通式(2)及通式(3)中的R3表示1價取代基。R3所表示的1價取代基可自後述取代基T中選擇,較佳為:鹵素原子(較佳為氯原子或者溴原子)、氰基、硝基、羥基、胺基、芳基、總碳數2~20的烷氧基羰基、總碳數6~20的芳氧基、總碳數1~20的烷基硫基、總碳數6~20的芳基硫基、總碳數1~20的烷基、或者總碳數1~20的烷氧基,更佳為甲基或者甲氧基。 R 3 in the general formula (2) and the general formula (3) represents a monovalent substituent. The monovalent substituent represented by R 3 may be selected from the substituent T described later, and is preferably a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom), a cyano group, a nitro group, a hydroxyl group, an amine group, an aryl group, and a total. Alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, alkylthio group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, arylthio group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and total carbon number 1 An alkyl group of ~20 or an alkoxy group having a total carbon number of 1 to 20 is more preferably a methyl group or a methoxy group.

c為0~4的整數,較佳為0或1,尤佳為0。於c為2以上的情況下,存在多個的R3可相同,亦可不同。 c is an integer from 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, more preferably 0. When c is 2 or more, a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different.

通式(2)及通式(3)中,Y表示-O-、-S-、-SO2-、或者-NR8-,較佳為-O-或者-SO2-,更佳為-O-。 In the general formula (2) and the general formula (3), Y represents -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -NR 8 -, preferably -O- or -SO 2 -, more preferably - O-.

藉由將Y設為-O-或者-SO2-,可將索雷譜帶(soret band)的吸收進行短波長化,存在更有效果地發揮吸收的對比度的傾向。 By setting Y to -O- or -SO 2 -, the absorption of the Soret band can be shortened, and the contrast of absorption can be more effectively exhibited.

R8表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基,較佳為氫原子、碳數1~3的烷基、苯基,更佳為氫原子或 者甲基,尤佳為氫原子。可具有取代基的烷基等的例子如後述。 R 8 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. Especially preferred is a hydrogen atom. Examples of the alkyl group or the like which may have a substituent are as described later.

通式(4)中的R4表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的烷氧基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的芳基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基,較佳為氫原子、總碳數1~20的烷基、總碳數6~20的芳基、總碳數2~20的二烷基胺基、總碳數12~20的二芳基胺基、或者總碳數7~20烷基芳基胺基,尤佳為總碳數1~20的烷基、總碳數2~20的二烷基胺基、總碳數12~20的二芳基胺基、或者總碳數7~20烷基芳基胺基,特佳為總碳數12~20的二芳基胺基或者總碳數2~20的二烷基胺基。 R 4 in the formula (4) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, and may have a dialkylamino group of a substituent, an arylamine group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom, total An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamine group having a total carbon number of 12 to 20, or a total carbon number of 7 ~20 alkylarylamine group, particularly preferably an alkyl group having a total carbon number of 1 to 20, a dialkylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 20, a diarylamino group having a total carbon number of 12 to 20, or a total The carbon number is 7 to 20 alkylarylamine groups, particularly preferably a diarylamine group having a total carbon number of 12 to 20 or a dialkylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 20.

所述的烷基、芳基等烷基部位及芳基部位可更具有取代基,該取代基較佳為烷氧基、芳基、芳氧基、烷氧基羰基、烷基硫基、芳基硫基、或者鹵素原子等,更佳為烷氧基,尤佳為甲氧基或者乙氧基。另外,不具有取代基的態樣亦較佳。可具有取代基的烷基等的例子如後述。 The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety of the alkyl group, the aryl group and the like may further have a substituent, and the substituent is preferably an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylthio group, or an aromatic group. A thiol group, a halogen atom or the like is more preferably an alkoxy group, and particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. Further, a form having no substituent is also preferable. Examples of the alkyl group or the like which may have a substituent are as described later.

通式(5)中,d表示0~2的整數,當d為0或1時,R5為可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基,當d為2時,表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基。當d為2時,R5較佳為表示碳數2~20的二烷基胺基、碳數12~20的二芳基胺基、或者碳數7~20的烷基 芳基胺基。 In the formula (5), d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and when d is 2, it represents An alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent . When d is 2, R 5 is preferably a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamine group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylarylamine group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms.

所述的烷基、芳基等烷基部位及芳基部位可更具有取代基,其取代基可例示後述取代基T,較佳為烷氧基、芳基、芳氧基、烷氧基羰基、烷基硫基、芳基硫基或者鹵素原子等,更佳為烷氧基,尤佳為甲氧基或者乙氧基。另外,不具有取代基的態樣亦較佳。可具有取代基的烷基等的例子如後述。 The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety of the alkyl group, the aryl group and the like may further have a substituent, and the substituent may be exemplified by the substituent T described later, preferably an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group or an alkoxycarbonyl group. An alkylthio group, an arylthio group or a halogen atom, etc., more preferably an alkoxy group, particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. Further, a form having no substituent is also preferable. Examples of the alkyl group or the like which may have a substituent are as described later.

通式(6)中,R6表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基羰基、可具有取代基的芳基羰基、可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基,較佳為碳數1~20的烷基、碳數6~20的芳基、碳數2~20的烷基羰基、碳數7~20的芳基羰基、碳數1~20的烷基磺醯基、或者碳數6~20的芳基磺醯基,更佳為碳數2~20的烷基羰基、碳數7~20的芳基羰基、碳數1~20的烷基磺醯基、或者碳數6~20的芳基磺醯基。 In the formula (6), R 6 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, and an alkyl group which may have a substituent A sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and a carbon number of 7 ~20 arylcarbonyl, alkyl 1-20 sulfonyl, or 6 to 20 arylsulfonyl, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon carbonyl, carbon number 7-20 An arylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.

所述的烷基、芳基等烷基部位及芳基部位可更具有取代基,其取代基可例示後述取代基T,較佳為烷氧基、芳基、芳氧基、烷氧基羰基、烷基硫基、芳基硫基或者鹵素原子等,更佳為烷氧基,尤佳為甲氧基或者乙氧基。另外,不具有取代基的態樣亦較佳。可具有取代基的烷基等的例子如後述。 The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety of the alkyl group, the aryl group and the like may further have a substituent, and the substituent may be exemplified by the substituent T described later, preferably an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group or an alkoxycarbonyl group. An alkylthio group, an arylthio group or a halogen atom, etc., more preferably an alkoxy group, particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. Further, a form having no substituent is also preferable. Examples of the alkyl group or the like which may have a substituent are as described later.

通式(6)中,R7表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基,較佳為碳數1~20的烷基、或者碳數6~20的芳基。 In the formula (6), R 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. base.

所述的烷基、芳基等烷基部位及芳基部位可更具有取代基,該取代基可例示後述取代基T,較佳為烷氧基、芳基、芳氧基、烷氧基羰基、烷基硫基、芳基硫基或者鹵素原子等,更佳為烷氧基,尤佳為甲氧基或者乙氧基。另外,所述烷基部位及芳基部位不具有取代基的態樣亦較佳。可具有取代基的烷基等的例子如後述。 The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety of the alkyl group, the aryl group and the like may further have a substituent, and the substituent may, for example, be a substituent T described later, preferably an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group or an alkoxycarbonyl group. An alkylthio group, an arylthio group or a halogen atom, etc., more preferably an alkoxy group, particularly preferably a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. Further, it is also preferred that the alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety have no substituent. Examples of the alkyl group or the like which may have a substituent are as described later.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷基可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、異丙基、第三丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基、1-乙基戊基、2-乙基己基、十二烷基、十六烷基、環丙基、環戊基、環己基、1-降冰片基、1-金剛烷基、苯氧基甲基、苯氧基乙基、苄基、苯基乙基、4-苯基丁基、N-丁基胺基磺醯基丙基、N-丁基胺基羰基甲基、N,N-二丁基胺基磺醯基丙基、乙氧基乙氧基乙基、2-氯乙基,尤佳為可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、異丙基、第三丁基、苯氧基乙基、苄基、苯基乙基、N-丁基胺基磺醯基丙基、N-丁基胺基羰基甲基、N,N-二丁基胺基磺醯基丙基、乙氧基乙氧基乙基,特佳為可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、第三丁基、2-乙基己基、苯氧基乙基、苄基、苯基乙基、4-苯基丁基、N-丁基胺基磺醯基丙基、N-丁基胺基羰基甲基、N,N-二丁基胺基磺醯基丙基、乙氧基乙氧基乙基。 The alkyl group which may have a substituent may, for example, be methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, 1-ethylpentyl, 2-ethyl Hexyl, dodecyl, hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-norbornyl, 1-adamantyl, phenoxymethyl, phenoxyethyl, benzyl, Phenylethyl, 4-phenylbutyl, N-butylaminosulfonylpropyl, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl, N,N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl, B Oxyethoxyethyl, 2-chloroethyl, particularly preferably: methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, phenoxyethyl, benzyl, phenyl Base, N-butylaminosulfonylpropyl, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl, N,N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl, ethoxyethoxyethyl, especially To be mentioned, methyl, ethyl, propyl, tert-butyl, 2-ethylhexyl, phenoxyethyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, 4-phenylbutyl, N-butylamine Sulfosylpropyl, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl, N,N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl, ethoxyethoxyethyl.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷氧基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkoxy group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷氧基例如可列舉甲氧基、乙氧基、1-丁氧基、2-丁氧基、丙氧基、異丙氧基、第三丁氧基、十二烷基氧基,另外,若為環烷基氧基,則例如可列舉環戊基氧基、環己基氧基,特佳為可列舉甲氧基、乙氧基、1-丁氧基、異丙氧基、第三丁氧基。 Examples of the alkoxy group which may have a substituent include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a 1-butoxy group, a 2-butoxy group, a propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, a third butoxy group, and a dodecyl group. Further, examples of the cycloalkyloxy group include a cyclopentyloxy group and a cyclohexyloxy group, and particularly preferably a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a 1-butoxy group, and an isopropoxy group. Base, third butoxy.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的芳基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的芳基可列舉:苯基、2-氯苯基、2-甲氧基苯基、4-丁氧基羰基苯基、4-N,N-二丁基胺基羰基苯基、4-N-丁基胺基磺醯基苯基、4-N,N-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯基,尤佳為可列舉:苯基、4-丁氧基羰基苯基、4-N,N-二丁基胺基羰基苯基、4-N-丁基胺基磺醯基苯基、4-N,N-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯基,特佳為可列舉:苯基、4-丁氧基羰基苯基、4-N,N-二丁基胺基羰基苯基、4-N,N-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯基。 Examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent include a phenyl group, a 2-chlorophenyl group, a 2-methoxyphenyl group, a 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl group, and a 4-N,N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl group. 4-N-butylaminosulfonylphenyl, 4-N,N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl, more preferably phenyl, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl, 4-N,N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl, 4-N-butylaminosulfonylphenyl, 4-N,N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl, especially preferably Listed: phenyl, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl, 4-N,N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl, 4-N,N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基胺基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkylamino group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷基胺基例如可列舉:甲基胺基、乙基胺基、丁基胺基、十四烷基胺基、2-乙基己基胺基、環己基胺基,特佳為可列舉:乙基胺基、丁基胺基、2-乙基己基胺基。 Examples of the alkylamino group which may have a substituent include a methylamino group, an ethylamino group, a butylamino group, a tetradecylamino group, a 2-ethylhexylamino group, and a cyclohexylamino group. Examples thereof include an ethylamino group, a butylamino group, and a 2-ethylhexylamino group.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的二烷基胺基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the dialkylamino group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的二烷基胺基可列舉:N,N-二甲基胺基、N,N- 二丁基胺基、N,N-二辛基胺基、N,N-二(2-乙基己基)胺基、N-甲基-N-苄基胺基、N,N-二(2-乙氧基乙基)胺基、N,N-二(2-羥基乙基)胺基。 Examples of the dialkylamino group which may have a substituent include N,N-dimethylamino group, N,N- Dibutylamino, N,N-dioctylamino, N,N-bis(2-ethylhexyl)amine, N-methyl-N-benzylamine, N,N-di(2 -Ethoxyethyl)amino, N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)amine.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的芳基胺基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the arylamine group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的芳基胺基例如可列舉:苯胺基、2-甲基苯胺基、2-乙基苯胺基、2-異丙基苯胺基、2,6-二甲基苯胺基、2,4,6-三甲基苯胺基、3-甲基苯胺基、4-甲基苯胺基、2-甲氧基苯胺基,特佳為可列舉:苯胺基、2-甲基苯胺基、2,6-二甲基苯胺基。 Examples of the arylamine group which may have a substituent include an anilino group, a 2-methylanilino group, a 2-ethylanilino group, a 2-isopropylanilino group, a 2,6-dimethylanilino group, and 2, 4,6-trimethylanilino, 3-methylanilino, 4-methylanilino, 2-methoxyanilino, particularly preferred are anilino, 2-methylanilino, 2, 6-dimethylanilino.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的二芳基胺基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the diarylamine group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的二芳基胺基可列舉:N,N-二苯基胺基、N,N-二(4-甲氧基苯基)胺基、N,N-二(4-醯基苯基)胺基。 Examples of the diarylamine group which may have a substituent include N,N-diphenylamino group, N,N-bis(4-methoxyphenyl)amino group, and N,N-bis(4-fluorenyl group). Phenyl)amine group.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基可列舉:N-甲基-N-苯基胺基、N-苄基-N-苯基胺基、N-甲基-N-(4-甲氧基苯基)胺基。 The alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent may, for example, be N-methyl-N-phenylamino, N-benzyl-N-phenylamine, N-methyl-N-(4-methoxy Alkyl phenyl)amino group.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基羰基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷基羰基可列舉:乙醯基、丙基羰基、庚基-3-羰基、2-乙基己氧基甲基羰基、苯氧基甲基羰基、2-乙基己氧基羰基甲基羰基。 The alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent may, for example, be an ethyl fluorenyl group, a propylcarbonyl group, a heptyl-3-carbonyl group, a 2-ethylhexyloxymethylcarbonyl group, a phenoxymethylcarbonyl group or a 2-ethylhexyloxy group. Alkylcarbonylmethylcarbonyl.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的芳基羰基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的芳基羰基可列舉:苯甲醯基、4-甲氧基苯甲醯基、4-乙氧基羰基苯甲醯基。 Examples of the arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent include a benzamidine group, a 4-methoxybenzylidene group, and a 4-ethoxycarbonylbenzylidene group.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基可列舉:甲磺醯基、丁磺醯基、辛磺醯基、十二烷基磺醯基、苄基磺醯基、苯氧基丙基磺醯基。 The alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent may, for example, be a methylsulfonyl group, a butasulfonyl group, an octylsulfonyl group, a dodecylsulfonyl group, a benzylsulfonyl group or a phenoxypropylsulfonyl group. .

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基可列舉:苯基磺醯基、4-甲基苯基磺醯基、2-甲氧基苯基磺醯基、4-乙氧基羰基苯基磺醯基。 Examples of the arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent include a phenylsulfonyl group, a 4-methylphenylsulfonyl group, a 2-methoxyphenylsulfonyl group, and a 4-ethoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl group. base.

示出所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基胺基的較佳例。 Preferred examples of the alkylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent in the above formula (2) to formula (6) are shown.

可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基胺基可列舉:甲基磺醯基胺基、丁基磺醯基胺基、羥基丙基磺醯基胺基、2-乙基己基磺醯基胺基、正辛基磺醯基胺基、苯氧基乙基磺醯基胺基、烯丙基磺醯基胺基。 Examples of the alkylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent include a methylsulfonylamino group, a butylsulfonylamino group, a hydroxypropylsulfonylamino group, and a 2-ethylhexylsulfonylamino group. , n-octylsulfonylamino, phenoxyethylsulfonylamino, allylsulfonylamino.

所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的乙烯基磺醯基胺基可列舉:乙烯基磺醯基胺基、1-甲基乙烯基磺醯基胺基。 The vinylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formula (2) to the general formula (6) may, for example, be a vinylsulfonylamino group or a 1-methylvinylsulfonylamino group.

所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基胺基可列舉:苯基磺醯基胺基、對甲氧基苯基磺醯基胺基、 對乙氧基羰基磺醯基胺基等。 Examples of the arylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulae (2) to (6) include a phenylsulfonylamino group and a p-methoxyphenylsulfonylamino group. P-ethoxycarbonylsulfonylamino group and the like.

所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的烷基羰基胺基可列舉:甲基羰基胺基、2-乙基己醯基胺基、正庚基羰基胺基、乙氧基乙氧基甲基羰基胺基等。 The alkylcarbonylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formula (2) to the general formula (6) may, for example, be a methylcarbonylamino group, a 2-ethylhexylamino group or a n-heptylcarbonylamino group. Ethoxyethoxymethylcarbonylamino group and the like.

所述通式(2)~通式(6)中的可具有取代基的芳基羰基胺基可列舉:苯甲醯基胺基、2-甲氧基苯甲醯基胺基、4-乙烯基苯甲醯基胺基等。 The arylcarbonylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formula (2) to the general formula (6) may, for example, be a benzindylamino group, a 2-methoxybenzhydrylamino group or a 4-ethylene group. Benzobenzamide or the like.

所述通式(1)中的R1尤佳為由下述通式(7)所表示。 R 1 in the above formula (1) is particularly preferably represented by the following formula (7).

通式(7)中,R8、R9分別獨立地表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基。R31表示取代基。c1表示0~4的整數。 In the formula (7), R 8 and R 9 each independently represent an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and an aryl group which may have a substituent. R 31 represents a substituent. C1 represents an integer from 0 to 4.

R31與通式(2)中的R3含義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。c1與通式(2)中的c含義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 R 31 has the same meaning as R 3 in the formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same. C1 has the same meaning as c in the formula (2), and the preferred range is also the same.

R8及R9分別獨立地表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基 的芳基。可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基與通式(5)的R5中的可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基分別含義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 R 8 and R 9 each independently represent an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and an aryl group which may have a substituent. The alkyl group which may have a substituent, the aryl group which may have a substituent, and the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 5 of the formula (5), and the aryl group which may have a substituent have the same meanings, and the preferred range is also the same .

通式(7)所表示的基團特佳為通式(9)所表示的基團。 The group represented by the formula (7) is particularly preferably a group represented by the formula (9).

通式(9)中,R81、R91分別獨立地表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基。 In the formula (9), R 81 and R 91 each independently represent an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and an aryl group which may have a substituent.

R81及R91分別獨立地表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基。可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基與通式(7)的R8及R9中的可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基含義相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 R 81 and R 91 each independently represent an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and an aryl group which may have a substituent. The alkyl group which may have a substituent, the aryl group which may have a substituent has the same meaning as the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 8 and R 9 of the formula (7), and the aryl group which may have a substituent, and a preferred range The same is true.

可具有取代基的烷基較佳為碳數1~12的可具有取代基的烷基,更佳為碳數1~8的可具有取代基的烷基,尤佳為碳數1~6的可具有取代基的烷基。取代基的例子可例示後述的取代基T。可具有取代基的烷基可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、異丙基、第三丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基、2-乙基己基、環丙基、環丁基、 環戊基、環己基、2-乙基己基等。 The alkyl group which may have a substituent is preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a carbon number of 1 to 6. An alkyl group which may have a substituent. The substituent T which will be described later can be exemplified as an example of the substituent. The alkyl group which may have a substituent may, for example, be a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a cyclopropyl group or a ring. Butyl, Cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 2-ethylhexyl and the like.

所謂取代基T,是指選自以下的取代基組群中的任意取代基。 The substituent T means any substituent selected from the group of substituents below.

鹵素原子(較佳為氯原子、溴原子)、烷基(較佳為碳數1~24的直鏈、分支鏈、或者環狀的烷基,例如:甲基、乙基、丙基、異丙基、丁基、第三丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基、2-乙基己基、十二烷基、十六烷基、環丙基、環戊基、環己基、1-降冰片基、1-金剛烷基)、烯基(較佳為碳數2~18的烯基,例如:乙烯基、烯丙基、3-丁烯-1-基)、芳基(較佳為碳數6~24的芳基,例如:苯基、萘基)、雜環基(較佳為碳數1~18的雜環基,例如:2-噻吩基、4-吡啶基、2-呋喃基、2-嘧啶基、1-吡啶基、2-苯并噻唑基、1-咪唑基、1-吡唑基、苯并三唑-1-基)、矽烷基(較佳為碳數3~18的矽烷基,例如:三甲基矽烷基、三乙基矽烷基、三丁基矽烷基、第三丁基二甲基矽烷基、第三己基二甲基矽烷基)、羥基、氰基、硝基、烷氧基(較佳為碳數1~24的烷氧基,例如:甲氧基、乙氧基、1-丁氧基、2-丁氧基、異丙氧基、第三丁氧基、十二烷基氧基,另外,若為環烷基氧基,則例如:環戊基氧基、環己基氧基)、芳氧基(較佳為碳數6~24的芳氧基,例如:苯氧基、1-萘氧基)、雜環氧基(較佳為碳數1~18的雜環氧基,例如:1-苯基四唑-5-氧基、2-四氫吡喃基氧基)、矽烷基氧基(較佳為碳數1~18的矽烷基氧基,例如:三甲基矽烷基氧基、第三丁基二甲基矽烷基氧基、二苯基甲基矽烷基氧基)、醯氧基(較佳為碳數 2~24的醯氧基,例如:乙醯氧基、三甲基乙醯氧基、2-乙基己醯氧基、2-甲基丙醯氧基、辛醯氧基、丁醯氧基、2-甲基丁醯氧基、苯甲醯氧基、十二醯氧基)、烷氧基羰基氧基(較佳為碳數2~24的烷氧基羰基氧基,例如:乙氧基羰基氧基、第三丁氧基羰基氧基,另外,若為環烷基氧基羰基氧基,則例如:環己氧基羰基氧基)、芳氧基羰基氧基(較佳為碳數7~24的芳氧基羰基氧基,例如:苯氧基羰基氧基)、胺甲醯氧基(較佳為碳數1~24的胺甲醯氧基,例如:N,N-二甲基胺甲醯氧基、N-丁基胺甲醯氧基、N-苯基胺甲醯氧基、N-乙基-N-苯基胺甲醯氧基)、胺磺醯氧基(較佳為碳數1~24的胺磺醯氧基,例如:N,N-二乙基胺磺醯氧基、N-丙基胺磺醯氧基)、烷基磺醯氧基(較佳為碳數1~24的烷基磺醯氧基,例如:甲基磺醯氧基、十六烷基磺醯氧基、環己基磺醯氧基)、芳基磺醯氧基(較佳為碳數6~24的芳基磺醯氧基,例如:苯基磺醯氧基)、醯基(較佳為碳數1~24的醯基,例如:甲醯基、乙醯基、三甲基乙醯基、苯甲醯基、十四醯基、環己醯基)、烷氧基羰基(較佳為碳數2~24的烷氧基羰基,例如:甲氧基羰基、乙氧基羰基、十八烷基氧基羰基、環己氧基羰基、2,6-二-第三丁基-4-甲基環己氧基羰基)、芳氧基羰基(較佳為碳數7~24的芳氧基羰基,例如:苯氧基羰基)、胺甲醯基(較佳為碳數1~24的胺甲醯基,例如:胺甲醯基、N,N-二乙基胺甲醯基、N-乙基-N-辛基胺甲醯基、N,N-二丁基胺甲醯基、N-丙基胺甲醯基、N-苯基胺甲 醯基、N-甲基-N-苯基胺甲醯基、N,N-二環己基胺甲醯基)、胺基(較佳為碳數24以下的胺基,例如:胺基、甲基胺基、N,N-二丁基胺基、十四烷基胺基、2-乙基己基胺基、環己基胺基)、苯胺基(較佳為6~24的苯胺基,例如:苯胺基、N-甲基苯胺基)、雜環胺基(較佳為1~18的雜環胺基,例如:4-吡啶基胺基)、碳醯胺基(較佳為2~24的碳醯胺基,例如:乙醯胺基、苯甲醯胺基、十四烷醯胺基、三甲基乙醯基醯胺基、環己烷醯胺基)、脲基(較佳為碳數1~24的脲基,例如:脲基、N,N-二甲基脲基、N-苯基脲基)、醯亞胺基(較佳為碳數24以下的醯亞胺基,例如:N-丁二醯亞胺基、N-鄰苯二甲醯亞胺基)、烷氧基羰基胺基(較佳為碳數2~24的烷氧基羰基胺基,例如:甲氧基羰基胺基、乙氧基羰基胺基、第三丁氧基羰基胺基、十八烷基氧基羰基胺基、環己氧基羰基胺基)、芳氧基羰基胺基(較佳為碳數7~24的芳氧基羰基胺基,例如:苯氧基羰基胺基)、磺醯胺基(較佳為碳數1~24的磺醯胺基,例如:甲磺醯胺基、丁磺醯胺基、苯磺醯胺基、十六烷磺醯胺基、環己磺醯胺基)、胺磺醯基胺基(較佳為碳數1~24的胺磺醯基胺基,例如:N,N-二丙基胺磺醯基胺基、N-乙基-N-十二烷基胺磺醯基胺基)、偶氮基(較佳為碳數1~24的偶氮基,例如:苯基偶氮基、3-吡唑基偶氮基)、烷基硫基(較佳為碳數1~24的烷基硫基,例如:甲基硫基、乙基硫基、辛基硫基、環己基硫基)、芳基硫基(較佳為碳數6~24的芳基硫基,例如:苯基硫基)、雜 環硫基(較佳為碳數1~18的雜環硫基,例如:2-苯并噻唑基硫基、2-吡啶基硫基、1-苯基四唑基硫基)、烷基亞磺醯基(較佳為碳數1~24的烷基亞磺醯基,例如:十二烷亞磺醯基)、芳基亞磺醯基(較佳為碳數6~24的芳基亞磺醯基,例如:苯基亞磺醯基)、烷基磺醯基(較佳為碳數1~24的烷基磺醯基,例如:甲基磺醯基、乙基磺醯基、丙基磺醯基、丁基磺醯基、異丙基磺醯基、2-乙基己基磺醯基、十六烷基磺醯基、辛基磺醯基、環己基磺醯基)、芳基磺醯基(較佳為碳數6~24的芳基磺醯基,例如:苯基磺醯基、1-萘基磺醯基)、胺磺醯基(較佳為碳數24以下的胺磺醯基,例如:胺磺醯基、N,N-二丙基胺磺醯基、N-乙基-N-十二烷基胺磺醯基、N-乙基-N-苯基胺磺醯基、N-環己基胺磺醯基)、磺基、膦醯基(較佳為碳數1~24的膦醯基,例如:苯氧基膦醯基、辛氧基膦醯基、苯基膦醯基)、以及亞膦醯基胺基(較佳為碳數1~24的亞膦醯基胺基,例如:二乙氧基亞膦醯基胺基、二辛氧基亞膦醯基胺基)。 a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom) or an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group or the like). Propyl, butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1 - norbornyl, 1-adamantyl), alkenyl (preferably alkenyl having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, 3-buten-1-yl), aryl (comparative Preferred are aryl groups having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, naphthyl, and heterocyclic groups (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, 2-thienyl, 4-pyridyl, 2 - furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 1-pyridyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), decylalkyl (preferably carbon number) a decyl group of 3 to 18, for example, a trimethyl decyl group, a triethyl decyl group, a tributyl decyl group, a tert-butyl dimethyl decyl group, a third hexyl dimethyl decyl group, a hydroxyl group, a cyanogen group a nitro group, an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a 1-butoxy group, or a 2- An oxy group, an isopropoxy group, a tert-butoxy group, a dodecyloxy group, and, if it is a cycloalkyloxy group, for example, a cyclopentyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group, or an aryloxy group ( Preferred is an aryloxy group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenoxy group, a 1-naphthyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group (preferably a heterocyclic oxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, 1-benzene). a tetrazole-5-oxy group, a 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy group, a decyloxy group (preferably a decyloxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, a trimethyl decyloxy group, Tributyl dimethyl decyloxy, diphenylmethyl fluorenyloxy), decyloxy (preferably carbon number) 2 to 24 decyloxy groups, for example: ethoxylated, trimethylethoxycarbonyl, 2-ethylhexyloxy, 2-methylpropoxy, octyloxy, butoxy , 2-methylbutanoxy, benzhydryloxy, dodecyloxy), alkoxycarbonyloxy (preferably alkoxycarbonyloxy having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example: ethoxylated) a carbonyloxy group, a third butoxycarbonyloxy group, and, if it is a cycloalkyloxycarbonyloxy group, for example, a cyclohexyloxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a carbon) a 7 to 24 aryloxycarbonyloxy group, for example, a phenoxycarbonyloxy group, an amine methyl methoxy group (preferably an amine methoxy group having a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, N, N-di Methylamine methyl methoxy, N-butylamine methyl methoxy, N-phenylamine methyl methoxy, N-ethyl-N-phenylamine methyl oxy), amine sulfonyloxy ( Preferred is an aminesulfonyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, N,N-diethylaminesulfonyloxy, N-propylaminesulfonyloxy), alkylsulfonyloxy (preferably). It is an alkylsulfonyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methylsulfonyloxy group, cetylsulfonyloxy group, cyclohexylsulfonyloxy group, or arylsulfonyloxy group (preferably An arylsulfonyloxy group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenylsulfonyloxy group, a fluorenyl group (preferably a fluorenyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a fluorenyl group, an ethyl fluorenyl group, and a trimethyl group) Alkoxycarbonyl, benzhydryl, tetradecyl, cyclohexyl), alkoxycarbonyl (preferably alkoxycarbonyl having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxy) Carbonyl group, octadecyloxycarbonyl group, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylcyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably carbon number 7~) An aryloxycarbonyl group of 24, for example, a phenoxycarbonyl group, an amine carbenyl group (preferably an amine carbenyl group having a carbon number of 1 to 24, for example, an amine carbenyl group, an N,N-diethylamine group) Sulfhydryl, N-ethyl-N-octylamine, mercapto, N,N-dibutylamine, mercapto, N-propylamine, N-phenylamine An anthracene group, an N-methyl-N-phenylamine methyl sulfonyl group, an N,N-dicyclohexylamine methyl fluorenyl group, an amine group (preferably an amine group having a carbon number of 24 or less, for example, an amine group, A An amino group, N,N-dibutylamino group, tetradecylamino group, 2-ethylhexylamino group, cyclohexylamino group), an anilino group (preferably an anthranyl group of 6 to 24, for example: An anilino group, an N-methylanilino group, a heterocyclic amine group (preferably a heterocyclic amino group of 1 to 18, for example, a 4-pyridylamino group), a carboguanamine group (preferably 2 to 24) Carboguanamine group, for example: acetamino group, benzammonium group, tetradecylguanidinium group, trimethylacetamidoguanyl group, cyclohexaneguanidinyl group, urea group (preferably carbon) a ureido group having 1 to 24, for example, a ureido group, an N,N-dimethylureido group, an N-phenylureido group, or a quinone imine group (preferably a quinone imine group having a carbon number of 24 or less, for example : N-butylenedimino group, N-phthalimido group, alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methoxy group) Carbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, octadecyloxycarbonylamino, cyclohexyloxycarbonylamino), aryloxycarbonylamino An aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenoxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonylamino group (preferably a sulfonylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a methanesulfonylamino group) , butasulfonylamino, benzenesulfonylamino, hexadecanesulfonylamino, cyclohexylsulfonylamino), aminesulfonylamino (preferably amidoxime amine having a carbon number of 1 to 24) a group, for example, N,N-dipropylaminesulfonylamino, N-ethyl-N-dodecylaminesulfonylamino), azo (preferably having a carbon number of 1 to 24) An azo group, for example, a phenylazo group, a 3-pyrazolylazo group, an alkylthio group (preferably an alkylthio group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a methylthio group or an ethyl group) Sulfur, octylthio, cyclohexylthio), arylthio (preferably arylthio having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, phenylthio), hetero Cyclo-thio group (preferably a heterocyclic thio group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, 2-benzothiazolylthio group, 2-pyridylthio group, 1-phenyltetrazolylthio group), alkyl group a sulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfinylene group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a dodecylsulfinyl group) or an arylsulfinyl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms) a sulfonyl group, for example, a phenylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, and propyl Sulfosyl, butylsulfonyl, isopropylsulfonyl, 2-ethylhexylsulfonyl, hexadecylsulfonyl, octylsulfonyl, cyclohexylsulfonyl), aryl a sulfonyl group (preferably an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenylsulfonyl group, a 1-naphthylsulfonyl group), an aminesulfonyl group (preferably an amine having a carbon number of 24 or less) Sulfhydryl group, for example: amidoxime, N,N-dipropylaminesulfonyl, N-ethyl-N-dodecylammoniumsulfonyl, N-ethyl-N-phenylaminesulfonate Sulfhydryl, N-cyclohexylamine sulfonyl), sulfo, phosphinyl (preferably a fluorenyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, phenoxyphosphonium, octyloxyphosphonium, benzene Phosphine fluorenyl) Phosphinic acyl group (preferably having a carbon number of acyl group phosphinic 1 to 24, for example: diethoxy phosphonite acyl group, di-octyloxy alkylphosphonous acyl group).

另外,尤其就提高對鹼性顯影液的顯影性的觀點而言,取代基T較佳為形成鹼性水溶液可溶化部的取代基,例如:羧酸基、磺酸基、磷酸基、磺醯亞胺基、酚性羥基、乙醯乙醯胺基、乙醯乙酸酯基等取代基,或者經選自該些基團中的任意基團所取代的烷基、烷基氧基、烷基硫基、芳氧基、芳基硫基、烷基磺醯基、芳基磺醯基等取代基。 Further, in particular, from the viewpoint of improving the developability of the alkaline developing solution, the substituent T is preferably a substituent forming an alkali aqueous solution solubilizing moiety, for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a sulfonium group. a substituent such as an imido group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, an acetamethyleneamine group, an acetamidine acetate group, or an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group or an alkyl group substituted with any group selected from the group Substituents such as thiol, aryloxy, arylthio, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl.

於所述取代基T為可進而經取代的基團的情況下,可經 所述各基團的任一者進一步取代。此外,於具有2個以上取代基的情況下,該些取代基可相同,亦可不同。其中,本發明中的取代基較佳為每1分子的質量為500道耳頓(dalton)以下。 In the case where the substituent T is a group which may be further substituted, Any of the groups described above is further substituted. Further, in the case of having two or more substituents, the substituents may be the same or different. Among them, the substituent in the present invention preferably has a mass of 500 daltons or less per molecule.

本發明中的通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物較佳為下述通式(1')所表示的酞菁化合物。 The phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) in the present invention is preferably a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1').

通式(1')中,存在多個的XA表示氯原子,存在多個的RB表示下述通式(2')所表示的基團,存在多個的RA分別獨立地表示氫原子或者苯氧基。Q表示Cu或者Zn。多個e分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個m分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個s分別獨立地表示0~4的整數。其中,多個e的至少1個為1以上,多個m的至少1個為1以上。當然,於多個m的總和為1的情況下,XA亦表示氯原子。於多個e的總和為1的情況下,RB亦表示 下述通式(2')所表示的基團。於多個s的總和為1的情況下,RA亦分別獨立地表示氫原子或者苯氧基。多個e、多個m與多個s的總和為16。 In the general formula (1'), a plurality of X A represent a chlorine atom, and a plurality of R B represent a group represented by the following formula (2'), and a plurality of R A independently represent hydrogen. Atom or phenoxy. Q represents Cu or Zn. Each of the plurality of e independently represents an integer of 0 to 4, and the plurality of m independently represent integers of 0 to 4, and the plurality of s independently represent integers of 0 to 4, respectively. Among them, at least one of the plurality of e is 1 or more, and at least one of the plurality of m is 1 or more. Of course, in the case where the sum of a plurality of m is 1, X A also represents a chlorine atom. When the total of a plurality of e is 1, R B also represents a group represented by the following formula (2'). In the case where the sum of a plurality of s is 1, R A also independently represents a hydrogen atom or a phenoxy group. The sum of a plurality of e, a plurality of m, and a plurality of s is 16.

通式(2')中,RC表示選自由下述通式(4')~通式(6')所組成的組群中的1種1價取代基,RD表示甲基或者甲氧基。f表示1~5的整數,g表示0或1。f與g的合計不會超過5。YA表示-O-。 In the formula (2'), R C represents one monovalent substituent selected from the group consisting of the following general formulae (4') to (6'), and R D represents a methyl group or a methoxy group. base. f represents an integer from 1 to 5, and g represents 0 or 1. The total of f and g will not exceed 5. Y A represents -O-.

通式(4')中,RE表示氫原子、總碳數1~20的烷基、總碳數6~20的芳基、總碳數2~20的二烷基胺基、總碳數12~ 20的二芳基胺基、或者總碳數7~20烷基芳基胺基。通式(5')中,h為2,RF表示碳數2~20的二烷基胺基、碳數12~20的二芳基胺基、或者碳數7~20烷基芳基胺基。通式(6')中,RG表示碳數2~20的烷基羰基、碳數7~20的芳基羰基、碳數1~20的烷基磺醯基、或者碳數6~20的芳基磺醯基。RH表示甲基。 In the formula (4'), R E represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having a total carbon number of 1 to 20, an aryl group having a total carbon number of 6 to 20, a dialkylamino group having a total carbon number of 2 to 20, and a total carbon number. 12 to 20 diarylamine groups or a total of 7 to 20 alkylarylamine groups. In the formula (5'), h is 2, and R F represents a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms, or a 7 to 20 alkylarylamine having a carbon number of 7 to 20 base. In the formula (6'), R G represents an alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a carbon number of 6 to 20 Arylsulfonyl. R H represents a methyl group.

所述通式(1')中的各取代基、各數值等的較佳範圍與所述通式(1)中的各取代基、各數值的較佳範圍相同。 The preferred range of each substituent, each numerical value, and the like in the above formula (1') is the same as the preferred range of each substituent and each numerical value in the above formula (1).

通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的分子量較佳為1500~3500,更佳為1750~2500。 The molecular weight of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) is preferably from 1,500 to 3,500, more preferably from 1,750 to 2,500.

通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物可依據「作為功能性色素的酞菁(IPC股份有限公司發行)」、以及「酞菁-化學與功能-(IPC股份有限公司發行)」等中記載的方法來合成。 The phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) can be described in "Phase as a functional dye (issued by IPC Co., Ltd.)" and "phthalocyanine-chemistry and function - (issued by IPC Co., Ltd.)" The way to synthesize.

通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物可藉由使可經取代的鄰苯二甲腈於金屬源存在下進行縮合環化來合成。此時,藉由將多種鄰苯二甲腈混合,可合成導入有多種取代基的酞菁化合物。於使用單一的鄰苯二甲腈作為原料的情況下,亦最多存在4種環化異構物。 The phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) can be synthesized by subjecting a substitutable phthalonitrile to condensation cyclization in the presence of a metal source. At this time, a phthalocyanine compound into which a plurality of substituents are introduced can be synthesized by mixing a plurality of phthalonitriles. In the case where a single phthalonitrile is used as a raw material, there are also up to four cyclized isomers.

作為酞菁化合物的原料,就製造時不需要高溫等方面而言,較佳為鄰苯二甲腈,但並無特別限定,可藉由使用通常作為酞菁的原料而已知的原料,例如分別可經取代的鄰苯二甲酸、鄰苯二甲酸酐、鄰苯二甲醯亞胺,來合成導入有多種取代基的酞菁化合物。 The raw material of the phthalocyanine compound is preferably phthalonitrile, and is not particularly limited, and may be a raw material known as a raw material of phthalocyanine, for example, respectively. The phthalocyanine compound into which a plurality of substituents are introduced can be synthesized by substituting phthalic acid, phthalic anhydride, or phthalimide.

通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物可藉由使對應的鄰苯二甲腈(視需要與金屬鹽一起),在作為強有機鹼的1,8-二氮雜雙環[5,4,0]-7-十一烯等的存在下,於醇系溶劑中進行反應來合成。 The phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) can be used as a strong organic base by 1,8-diazabicyclo[5,4, by making the corresponding phthalonitrile (together with a metal salt as needed). In the presence of 0]-7-undecene, the reaction is carried out in an alcohol solvent to synthesize.

以下,示出通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的例示化合物。 Hereinafter, an exemplary compound of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) is shown.

但,本發明並不限定於該些例示化合物。 However, the invention is not limited to the exemplified compounds.

下述例示化合物中,M、R1、X及R分別表示通式(1)中的M、R1、X及R。 In the following exemplified compounds, M, R 1, X and R each represent the general formula (1), M, R 1, X and R.

另外,下述例示化合物中,a、n及r分別表示通式(1)中的多個a的總和、多個n的總和、以及多個r的總和。 Further, among the following exemplified compounds, a, n and r respectively represent the sum of a plurality of a in the formula (1), the sum of a plurality of n, and the sum of a plurality of r.

另外,下述例示化合物中,Y及Ar分別為R1所表示的通式(2)及通式(3)中的Y及芳香族的取代基。 Further, in the following exemplified compounds, Y and Ar are each a substituent of the formula (2) and the formula (3) represented by R 1 and an aromatic group.

另外,下述例示化合物中,Me表示甲基,Et表示乙基,Bu表示丁基,Ph表示苯基,環-C6H11表示環己基。 Further, in the following exemplified compounds, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, Ph represents a phenyl group, and ring-C 6 H 11 represents a cyclohexyl group.

另外,下述例示化合物中,Ar-1~Ar-51、Q-1~Q-10分別表示後述的取代基。該些取代基中,.表示鍵結位置。 Further, among the following exemplified compounds, Ar-1 to Ar-51 and Q-1 to Q-10 each represent a substituent described later. Among the substituents, Indicates the bond position.

接著,示出所述例示化合物的合成例。 Next, a synthesis example of the exemplified compound is shown.

此外,下述合成例中「份」表示「質量份」。 In addition, in the following synthesis example, "parts" means "parts by mass".

(例示化合物A-1的合成) (Exemplified synthesis of compound A-1)

使對羥基苯甲酸甲酯(20份)、二丁基胺(30份)的混合溶液於120℃下反應5小時。將反應液以乙酸乙酯(200份)、1N鹽酸(200份)進行萃取,將有機層分離、濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,藉此獲得4-二丁基胺基羰基苯酚30份。 A mixed solution of methylparaben (20 parts) and dibutylamine (30 parts) was reacted at 120 ° C for 5 hours. The reaction liquid was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 parts) and 1N hydrochloric acid (200 parts), and the organic layer was separated and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenol 30. Share.

繼而,使所得的取代苯酚(25份)、四氯鄰苯二甲腈(27份)、碳酸鉀(20份)、N-甲基吡咯啶酮(200份)的混合溶液,於60℃下反應3小時。利用乙酸乙酯、1N鹽酸水溶液對反應液進行分液操作。將有機層濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,獲得4-二丁基胺基羰基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈35份。此外,4-二丁基胺基羰基苯酚中混入有3位取代體。 Then, a mixed solution of the obtained substituted phenol (25 parts), tetrachlorophthalonitrile (27 parts), potassium carbonate (20 parts), and N-methylpyrrolidone (200 parts) at 60 ° C Reaction for 3 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to a liquid separation operation using ethyl acetate and 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid. After concentrating the organic layer, it was purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 35 parts of 4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile. Further, a 3-position substituent is mixed in 4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenol.

使所得的取代鄰苯二甲腈(20份)、氯化鋅(8份)、二甲基胺基乙醇(400份)的反應液於120℃下反應6小時。利用乙酸乙酯及1N鹽酸對反應液進行萃取操作,將有機層分離、濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,藉此獲得14份的例示化合物A-1。 The reaction mixture of the obtained substituted phthalonitrile (20 parts), zinc chloride (8 parts), and dimethylaminoethanol (400 parts) was reacted at 120 ° C for 6 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to an extraction operation using ethyl acetate and 1N hydrochloric acid, and the organic layer was separated and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 14 parts of the exemplified compound A-1.

所得化合物於氯仿中的最大吸收波長為710nm,莫耳吸光係數為125000。 The maximum absorption wavelength of the obtained compound in chloroform was 710 nm, and the molar absorption coefficient was 125,000.

(例示化合物A-2~例示化合物A-27、例示化合物A-37、例示化合物A-39、以及例示化合物A-40的合成) (Synthesis of exemplified compound A-2 to exemplified compound A-27, exemplified compound A-37, exemplified compound A-39, and exemplified compound A-40)

參考文獻資訊來合成與例示化合物Ar-2~例示化合物Ar-49對應的取代苯酚以及取代萘酚,使用該取代苯酚,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法來合成取代鄰苯二甲腈(取代苯酚的 羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物),繼而,合成鋅酞菁。 The substituted phenol corresponding to the exemplified compound Ar-2 to the exemplified compound Ar-49 and the substituted naphthol were synthesized by reference to the literature, and the substituted phenol was used to synthesize the substituted phthalate by the same method as the exemplified compound A-1. Nitrile (substituted phenol The substitution position of the hydroxyl group is a mixture of the 3 and 4 positions, and then, the zinc phthalocyanine is synthesized.

(例示化合物A-28的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-28)

使利用例示化合物A-1的合成中記載的方法來合成的4-二丁基胺基羰基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈(9.6份)、鄰苯二甲腈(2.5份)、氯化鋅(4份)、二甲基胺基乙醇(100份)的反應液,於120℃下反應6小時,取出,進行純化,藉此獲得8份的例示化合物A-28。 4-Dibutylaminocarbonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile (9.6 parts), phthalonitrile (2.5 parts), chlorine synthesized by the method described in the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1 The reaction solution of zinc (4 parts) and dimethylaminoethanol (100 parts) was reacted at 120 ° C for 6 hours, taken out, and purified, whereby 8 parts of the exemplified compound A-28 were obtained.

(例示化合物A-29的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-29)

使4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈(10.2份(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物))、鄰苯二甲腈(2.5份)、乙酸銅(3.0份)、苯甲酸銨(6.0份)、1-甲氧基-2-丙醇(100份)的反應液,於120℃下反應6小時,取出,進行純化,藉此獲得7份的例示化合物A-29。 4-Dibutylaminosulfonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile (10.2 parts (a mixture of substituted phenolic hydroxyl groups at the 3-position and 4-position)), phthalonitrile (2.5 a reaction solution of copper acetate (3.0 parts), ammonium benzoate (6.0 parts), 1-methoxy-2-propanol (100 parts), reacted at 120 ° C for 6 hours, taken out, purified, borrowed This gave 7 parts of the exemplified compound A-29.

(例示化合物A-30的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-30)

除了代替鄰苯二甲腈而使用3-苯氧基鄰苯二甲腈(4.4份)以外,利用與例示化合物A-29的合成相同的方法來合成例示化合物A-30。 The exemplified compound A-30 was synthesized by the same method as the exemplified compound A-29 except that 3-phenoxyphthalonitrile (4.4 parts) was used instead of phthalonitrile.

(例示化合物A-31的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-31)

使4-二丁基胺基羰基苯酚(25份)、四氯鄰苯二甲腈(13.5份)、碳酸鉀(20份)、N-甲基吡咯啶酮(200份)的混合溶液,於90℃下反應6小時。利用乙酸乙酯、1N鹽酸水溶液對反應液進行分液操作。將有機層濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,獲得20份的雙(4-二丁基胺基羰基苯氧基)二氯鄰苯二甲腈。此外,4- 二丁基胺基羰基苯酚的取代數為2,取代位置為3位及4位、5位的混合物。 a mixed solution of 4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenol (25 parts), tetrachlorophthalonitrile (13.5 parts), potassium carbonate (20 parts), and N-methylpyrrolidone (200 parts). The reaction was carried out at 90 ° C for 6 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to a liquid separation operation using ethyl acetate and 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid. After concentrating the organic layer, it was purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 20 parts of bis(4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenoxy)dichlorophthalonitrile. In addition, 4- The dibutylaminocarbonylphenol has a substitution number of 2, and the substitution position is a mixture of the 3 position and the 4 position and the 5 position.

除了以1比3的莫耳比來使用所得的雙(4-二丁基胺基羰基苯氧基)二氯鄰苯二甲腈及4-二丁基胺基羰基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈以外,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法來合成鋅酞菁,獲得例示化合物A-31。 The bis(4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenoxy)dichlorophthalonitrile and 4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenoxytrichloroortane were used in addition to the molar ratio of 1 to 3. In the same manner as in the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1, zinc phthalocyanine was synthesized in the same manner as the diacetonitrile to obtain the exemplified compound A-31.

(例示化合物A-32的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-32)

除了以3比1的莫耳比來使用4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物)及鄰苯二甲腈以外,利用與例示化合物A-28的合成相同的方法來合成鋅酞菁,獲得例示化合物A-32。 In addition to the 3 to 1 molar ratio, 4-dibutylaminosulfonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile (the substitution position of the hydroxyl group of the substituted phenol is a mixture of 3 and 4 positions) and the adjacent In addition to the phthalonitrile, zinc phthalocyanine was synthesized by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-28 to obtain the exemplified compound A-32.

(例示化合物A-33的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-33)

除了以1比1的莫耳比來使用4-(二(乙氧基乙基)胺基羰基)苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物)及4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈以外,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法來合成例示化合物A-33。 In addition to using a molar ratio of 1 to 1, 4-(bis(ethoxyethyl)aminocarbonyl)phenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile (the substitution position of the hydroxyl group of the substituted phenol is 3 and 4 positions) The exemplified compound A-33 was synthesized by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1 except for the mixture of 4-dibutylaminosulfonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile.

(例示化合物A-34的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-34)

使用2-二(乙氧基乙基)胺基羰基硫代苯酚及四氯鄰苯二甲腈,來合成2-二(乙氧基乙基)胺基羰基硫代苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈,繼而,於氯仿溶劑中使用間氯過氧苯甲酸,來合成2-二(乙氧基乙基)胺基羰基苯基磺醯基三氯鄰苯二甲腈。使用所得的取代鄰 苯二甲腈,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法來合成例示化合物A-34。 Synthesis of 2-bis(ethoxyethyl)aminocarbonylthiophenoxytrichloroorthophenyl using 2-bis(ethoxyethyl)aminocarbonylthiophenol and tetrachlorophthalonitrile Dimeronitrile, followed by the use of m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in a chloroform solvent to synthesize 2-bis(ethoxyethyl)aminocarbonylphenylsulfonyltrichlorophthalonitrile. Use the resulting substitution neighbor As the phthalonitrile, the exemplified compound A-34 was synthesized by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1.

(例示化合物A-35的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-35)

藉由使用2-二(乙氧基乙基)胺基羰基硫代苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈,利用乙酸銅、苯甲酸銨、1-甲氧基-2-丙醇進行反應,而獲得例示化合物A-35。 By using 2-bis(ethoxyethyl)aminocarbonylthiophenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile, the reaction is carried out using copper acetate, ammonium benzoate and 1-methoxy-2-propanol. The exemplified compound A-35 was obtained.

(例示化合物A-36的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-36)

使用4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯胺,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法,來合成4-二丁基胺基磺醯基胺基三氯鄰苯二甲腈,以莫耳比3比1來使用4-二丁基胺基磺醯基胺基三氯鄰苯二甲腈及鄰苯二甲腈,利用乙酸銅、苯甲酸銨、1-甲氧基-2-丙醇進行反應,藉此獲得例示化合物A-36。 Synthesis of 4-dibutylaminosulfonylaminotrichlorophthalonitrile using 4-dibutylaminosulfonylaniline in the same manner as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1 Ear ratio of 3 to 1 using 4-dibutylaminosulfonylaminotrichlorophthalonitrile and phthalonitrile, using copper acetate, ammonium benzoate, 1-methoxy-2-propene The alcohol was reacted, whereby the exemplified compound A-36 was obtained.

(例示化合物A-37的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-37)

使用6-二(乙氧基乙基)胺基磺醯基-2-萘酚,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法,來合成取代三氯鄰苯二甲腈,繼而,合成鋅酞菁,藉此獲得例示化合物A-37。 Synthesis of substituted trichlorophthalonitrile using the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1 using 6-bis(ethoxyethyl)aminosulfonyl-2-naphthol, followed by synthesis of zinc Phthalocyanine, whereby the exemplified compound A-37 was obtained.

(例示化合物A-38的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-38)

將4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈、苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈、以及3-苯氧基鄰苯二甲腈以以莫耳比成為1比1比2的方式進行混合,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法來獲得例示化合物A-38。 4-Dibutylaminosulfonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile, phenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile, and 3-phenoxyphthalonitrile to be in molar ratio 1 was mixed in a manner of 1 to 2, and the exemplified compound A-38 was obtained by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1.

(例示化合物A-41的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-41)

將4-二丁基胺基羰基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈以及苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈以莫耳比成為3比1的方式進行混合,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法來獲得例示化合物A-41。 Mixing 4-dibutylaminocarbonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile and phenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile in a molar ratio of 3 to 1, using and exemplified compound A-1 The same method was synthesized to obtain the exemplified compound A-41.

(例示化合物A-42的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-42)

使用4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯胺,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法,來合成4-二丁基胺基磺醯基胺基三氯鄰苯二甲腈,利用乙酸銅、苯甲酸銨、1-甲氧基-2-丙醇使其反應,藉此獲得例示化合物A-42。 Synthesis of 4-dibutylaminosulfonylaminotrichlorophthalonitrile using acetic acid using 4-dibutylaminosulfonylaniline in the same manner as in the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1 Copper, ammonium benzoate, and 1-methoxy-2-propanol were allowed to react, whereby the exemplified compound A-42 was obtained.

(例示化合物A-43、例示化合物A-44的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-43, Exemplary Compound A-44)

參考文獻資訊來合成與例示化合物A-43、例示化合物A-44對應的取代苯酚,使用該取代苯酚,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法,來合成取代鄰苯二甲腈(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物),繼而,合成鋅酞菁。 The substituted phenol corresponding to the exemplified compound A-43 and the exemplified compound A-44 was synthesized by reference to the literature, and the substituted phenol was used to synthesize the substituted phthalonitrile by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1. The substitution position of the hydroxyl group of phenol is a mixture of 3 and 4 positions, and then, zinc phthalocyanine is synthesized.

(例示化合物A-45的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-45)

使4-二丁基胺基磺醯基苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈(10.2份(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物))、四氯鄰苯二甲腈(1.77份)、碘化鋅(2.5份)、苯甲腈(30份)的反應液於135℃下反應48小時。利用乙酸乙酯及1N鹽酸對反應液進行萃取操作,將有機層分離、濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,藉此獲得10.3份的例示化合物A-45。 4-Dibutylaminosulfonylphenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile (10.2 parts (a mixture of substituted phenolic hydroxyl groups at the 3-position and 4-position)), tetrachlorophthalonitrile A reaction liquid of (1.77 parts), zinc iodide (2.5 parts), and benzonitrile (30 parts) was reacted at 135 ° C for 48 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to an extraction operation using ethyl acetate and 1N hydrochloric acid, and the organic layer was separated and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 10.3 parts of the exemplified compound A-45.

(例示化合物A-46的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-46)

除了代替四氯鄰苯二甲腈而使用鄰苯二甲腈(0.85份)以外, 利用與例示化合物A-45相同的方法來合成例示化合物A-46。 In addition to the use of phthalonitrile (0.85 parts) instead of tetrachlorophthalonitrile, The exemplified compound A-46 was synthesized by the same method as the exemplified compound A-45.

(例示化合物A-47的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-47)

使4-{雙(甲氧基乙基)胺基磺醯基}苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈(13.83份(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物))、碘化鋅(2.5份)、苯甲腈(30份)的反應液於135℃下反應48小時。利用乙酸乙酯及1N鹽酸對反應液進行萃取操作,將有機層分離、濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,藉此獲得9.8份的例示化合物A-47。 4-{bis(methoxyethyl)aminosulfonyl}phenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile (13.83 parts (the substitution position of the hydroxyl group of the substituted phenol is a mixture of the 3 and 4 positions)), The reaction solution of zinc iodide (2.5 parts) and benzonitrile (30 parts) was reacted at 135 ° C for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was subjected to an extraction operation using ethyl acetate and 1N hydrochloric acid, and the organic layer was separated and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 9.8 parts of the exemplified compound A-47.

(例示化合物A-48~例示化合物A-76的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-48~ Exemplary Compound A-76)

參考文獻資訊來合成與例示化合物A-48~例示化合物A-76對應的取代苯酚,使用該取代苯酚,利用與例示化合物A-1的合成相同的方法,來合成取代鄰苯二甲腈(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物)。 Reference information was used to synthesize a substituted phenol corresponding to the exemplified compound A-48 to the exemplified compound A-76, and the substituted phenol was used to synthesize a substituted phthalonitrile by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-1. The substitution position of the hydroxyl group of phenol is a mixture of 3 and 4 positions).

繼而,合成通式(1)中的「a」為3的鋅酞菁時利用與例示化合物A-46相同的方法,合成通式(1)中的「a」為4的鋅酞菁時利用與例示化合物A-47相同的方法來合成。 Then, in the case of synthesizing zinc phthalocyanine having "a" of 3 in the general formula (1), the zinc phthalocyanine having "a" of 4 in the general formula (1) is synthesized by the same method as the exemplified compound A-46. The synthesis was carried out in the same manner as in the exemplified compound A-47.

(例示化合物A-77的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-77)

於亞硫醯氯(49份)中分割添加羥基苯磺酸鈉(20份),進而滴加二甲基甲醯胺(1.4份)後,加熱回流2小時。將反應液於冰水中結晶化後,利用乙酸乙酯進行萃取,將有機層分離、濃縮,藉此獲得羥基苯磺醯氯19.7份。 Sodium hydroxybenzenesulfonate (20 parts) was added to sulfoxide (49 parts), and dimethylformamide (1.4 parts) was added dropwise thereto, followed by heating under reflux for 2 hours. The reaction solution was crystallized from ice water, extracted with ethyl acetate, and the organic layer was separated and concentrated to obtain 19.7 parts of hydroxybenzenesulfonyl chloride.

接著,於溶解有2-(乙基胺基)乙醇(9份)的N-甲基吡咯啶 酮(50份)溶液中,於冰浴下滴加羥基苯磺醯氯(19.2份)後,於50度下攪拌2小時。於反應液中添加水後,利用乙酸乙酯、1N鹽酸水溶液進行分液操作。將有機層濃縮後,添加30%氫氧化鈉水溶液200ml,於80℃下加熱攪拌5小時。利用乙酸乙酯、1N鹽酸水溶液對反應液進行分液操作。將有機層濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,獲得4-(N-乙基-N-羥基乙基胺磺醯基)苯酚15.1份。 Next, N-methylpyrrolidine dissolved in 2-(ethylamino)ethanol (9 parts) To the ketone (50 parts) solution, hydroxybenzenesulfonium chloride (19.2 parts) was added dropwise thereto in an ice bath, followed by stirring at 50 °C for 2 hours. After adding water to the reaction liquid, a liquid separation operation was carried out using ethyl acetate and a 1 N aqueous hydrochloric acid solution. After concentrating the organic layer, 200 ml of a 30% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution was added, and the mixture was stirred under heating at 80 ° C for 5 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to a liquid separation operation using ethyl acetate and 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid. The organic layer was concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 15.1 parts of 4-(N-ethyl-N-hydroxyethylaminesulfonyl)phenol.

接著,將4-(N-乙基-N-羥基乙基胺磺醯基)苯酚(12.2份)、吡啶(4.7份)、四氫呋喃(100份)的混合溶液冷卻至0℃,滴加乙醯氯(4.7份),攪拌3小時。利用乙酸乙酯、1N鹽酸水溶液對反應液進行分液操作。將有機層濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,獲得4-(N-乙醯氧基乙基-N-乙基胺磺醯基)苯酚12.5份。 Next, a mixed solution of 4-(N-ethyl-N-hydroxyethylaminesulfonyl)phenol (12.2 parts), pyridine (4.7 parts), and tetrahydrofuran (100 parts) was cooled to 0 ° C, and acetonitrile was added dropwise. Chlorine (4.7 parts), stirred for 3 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to a liquid separation operation using ethyl acetate and 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid. The organic layer was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography to give 12.5 parts of 4-(N-ethyloxyethyl-N-ethylaminesulfonyl) phenol.

繼而,使所得的取代苯酚(14.4份)、四氯鄰苯二甲腈(13.3份)、碳酸鉀(8.3份)、N-甲基吡咯啶酮(100份)的混合溶液於60℃下反應3小時。利用乙酸乙酯、1N鹽酸水溶液對反應液進行分液操作。將有機層濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,獲得4-(N-乙醯氧基乙基-N-乙基胺磺醯基)苯氧基三氯鄰苯二甲腈35份。此外,4-(N-乙醯氧基乙基-N-乙基胺磺醯基)苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物。 Then, a mixed solution of the obtained substituted phenol (14.4 parts), tetrachlorophthalonitrile (13.3 parts), potassium carbonate (8.3 parts), and N-methylpyrrolidone (100 parts) was reacted at 60 ° C. 3 hours. The reaction liquid was subjected to a liquid separation operation using ethyl acetate and 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid. After concentrating the organic layer, it was purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 35 parts of 4-(N-acetoxyethyl-N-ethylaminesulfonyl)phenoxytrichlorophthalonitrile. Further, the substitution position of the hydroxyl group of 4-(N-acetoxyethyl-N-ethylaminesulfonyl)phenol is a mixture of the 3 position and the 4 position.

使所得的取代鄰苯二甲腈(13.8份)、碘化鋅(2.5份)、苯甲腈(30份)的反應液於135℃下反應48小時。利用乙酸乙酯及1N鹽酸對反應液進行萃取操作,將有機層分離、濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,藉此獲得8.2份的例示化合物A-77。 The reaction mixture of the obtained substituted phthalonitrile (13.8 parts), zinc iodide (2.5 parts), and benzonitrile (30 parts) was reacted at 135 ° C for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was subjected to an extraction operation using ethyl acetate and 1N hydrochloric acid, and the organic layer was separated and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 8.2 parts of the exemplified compound A-77.

(例示化合物A-78的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-78)

使合成例示化合物<A-77>時使用的取代鄰苯二甲腈(10.3份)、四氯鄰苯二甲腈(1.77份)、碘化鋅(2.5份)、苯甲腈(30份)的反應液於135℃下反應48小時。利用乙酸乙酯及1N鹽酸對反應液進行萃取操作,將有機層分離、濃縮後,利用矽膠層析法進行純化,藉此獲得11.1份的例示化合物A-78。 The substituted phthalonitrile (10.3 parts), tetrachlorophthalonitrile (1.77 parts), zinc iodide (2.5 parts), benzonitrile (30 parts) used in the synthesis of the compound <A-77> were synthesized. The reaction solution was reacted at 135 ° C for 48 hours. The reaction mixture was subjected to an extraction operation using ethyl acetate and 1N hydrochloric acid, and the organic layer was separated and concentrated, and then purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain 11.1 parts of the exemplified compound A-78.

(例示化合物A-79~例示化合物A-112的合成) (Synthesis of Compound A-79~ Exemplary Compound A-112)

參考文獻資訊以及例示化合物A-77,來合成與例示化合物A-79~例示化合物A-112對應的取代苯酚,使用該取代苯酚,利用與例示化合物A-77的合成相同的方法,來合成取代鄰苯二甲腈(取代苯酚的羥基的取代位置為3位及4位的混合物)。 The reference literature and the exemplified compound A-77 were used to synthesize a substituted phenol corresponding to the exemplified compound A-79 to the exemplified compound A-112, and the substituted phenol was used to synthesize the substitution by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplified compound A-77. Phthalonitrile (the substitution position of the hydroxyl group of the substituted phenol is a mixture of the 3 and 4 positions).

繼而,合成通式(1)中的a為3的鋅酞菁時利用與例示化合物A-78的合成相同的方法,合成通式(1)中的a為4的鋅酞菁時利用與例示化合物A-77的合成相同的方法來合成。 Then, when the zinc phthalocyanine in which a is 3 in the general formula (1) is synthesized, the zinc phthalocyanine in which a is 4 in the general formula (1) is synthesized and exemplified by the same method as the synthesis of the exemplary compound A-78. The synthesis of Compound A-77 was carried out in the same manner as in the synthesis.

相對於綠色濾光片的總質量,綠色濾光片中的通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含量較佳為1質量%~80質量%,更佳為1質量%~70質量%,尤佳為3質量%~50質量%,特佳為10質量%~50質量%。 The content of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) in the green filter is preferably from 1% by mass to 80% by mass, more preferably from 1% by mass to 70% by mass, based on the total mass of the green filter. It is preferably from 3% by mass to 50% by mass, particularly preferably from 10% by mass to 50% by mass.

藉由設為所述範圍的含量,而獲得良好的色濃度,在畫素的圖案化變得良好的方面有利。 By setting the content in the above range, a good color density is obtained, which is advantageous in that the patterning of the pixels is good.

<黃色染料> <yellow dye>

綠色濾光片較佳為除了含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物以 外,還含有黃色染料。 The green filter preferably contains, in addition to the phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1), In addition, it also contains a yellow dye.

藉此,透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度以及該綠色光的色純度進一步提高。 Thereby, the brightness of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter and the color purity of the green light are further improved.

就進一步提高透射過綠色濾光片之後的綠色光的亮度的觀點而言,黃色染料較佳為:一分子內具有吡唑并三唑環的次甲基染料、一分子內具有吡啶酮環的偶氮染料、一分子內具有吡唑環的偶氮染料。 The yellow dye is preferably a methine dye having a pyrazolotriazole ring in one molecule and a pyridone ring in one molecule from the viewpoint of further increasing the brightness of the green light after being transmitted through the green filter. An azo dye, an azo dye having a pyrazole ring in one molecule.

關於該些黃色染料(次甲基染料、偶氮染料),例如可適當參照日本專利特開2011-164564號公報的記載。 For the yellow dyes (methine dyes, azo dyes), for example, the description of JP-A-2011-164564 can be referred to.

黃色染料較佳為一分子內具有吡唑并三唑環的次甲基染料,其中,尤佳為下述通式(I)或者下述通式(II)所表示的黃色染料。 The yellow dye is preferably a methine dye having a pyrazolotriazole ring in one molecule, and particularly preferably a yellow dye represented by the following formula (I) or the following formula (II).

於綠色濾光片含有下述通式(I)或者下述通式(II)所表示的黃色染料的情況下,綠色濾光片可僅含有一種該黃色染料,亦可含有2種以上。 When the green filter contains a yellow dye represented by the following formula (I) or the following formula (II), the green filter may contain only one type of the yellow dye, or may contain two or more kinds.

通式(I)中,R1、R2、R3及R4分別獨立地表示氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺磺醯基、氰基、芳基、或者雜芳基,於分子內存在多個的R1及R2分別可彼此相同,亦可不同。 In the formula (I), R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aminomethyl group, an amine sulfonyl group, a cyano group, or the like. The aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have the same or different R 1 and R 2 in the molecule.

通式(II)中,R4、R5、R6、R7及R8分別獨立地表示氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺磺醯基、磺醯基胺基、羰基胺基、氰基、芳基、或者雜芳基,於分子內存在多個的R5可彼此相同,亦可不同。 In the formula (II), R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amine carbaryl group, an amine sulfonyl group, The sulfonylamino group, the carbonylamino group, the cyano group, the aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have the same or different R 5 groups in the molecule.

通式(I)中,R1、R2、R3及R4分別獨立地表示氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺磺醯基、氰基、芳基、或者雜芳基,於分子內存在多個的R1及R2分別可彼此相同,亦可不同。 In the formula (I), R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aminomethyl group, an amine sulfonyl group, a cyano group, or the like. The aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have the same or different R 1 and R 2 in the molecule.

通式(II)中,R4、R5、R6、R7及R8分別獨立地表示氫原子、烷基、烷氧基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺磺醯基、磺醯基胺基、羰基胺基、氰基、芳基、或者雜芳基,於分子內存在多個的R5可彼此相同,亦可不同。 In the formula (II), R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amine carbaryl group, an amine sulfonyl group, The sulfonylamino group, the carbonylamino group, the cyano group, the aryl group or the heteroaryl group may have the same or different R 5 groups in the molecule.

通式(I)或通式(II)中,R1~R8所表示的烷基可進而具有1價取代基,可為直鏈狀,亦可為分支狀,亦可為環狀。烷基的總碳數較佳為1~30,尤佳為1~16。作為具體例,例如可列舉:甲基、乙基、丁基、異丙基、第三丁基、羥基乙基、甲氧基乙基、氰基乙基、三氟甲基、3-磺基丙基、4-磺基丁基、環己基等。 In the general formula (I) or the general formula (II), the alkyl group represented by R 1 to R 8 may further have a monovalent substituent, may be linear, may be branched, or may be cyclic. The total carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably from 1 to 30, particularly preferably from 1 to 16. Specific examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a hydroxyethyl group, a methoxyethyl group, a cyanoethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, and a 3-sulfo group. Propyl, 4-sulfobutyl, cyclohexyl and the like.

R1~R8所表示的烷氧基表示為-ORA(RA為烷基),RA 與R1~R8所表示的烷基含義相同,具體例亦相同。 The alkoxy group represented by R 1 to R 8 is represented by -OR A (R A is an alkyl group), and R A has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 1 to R 8 , and the specific examples are also the same.

R1~R8所表示的烷氧基羰基表示為-COORA(RA為烷基),RA與R1~R8所表示的烷基含義相同,具體例亦相同。 The alkoxycarbonyl group represented by R 1 to R 8 is represented by -COOR A (R A is an alkyl group), and R A has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 1 to R 8 , and the specific examples are also the same.

R1~R8所表示的胺甲醯基可進而具有1價取代基,較佳為總碳數1~30的胺甲醯基,尤佳為碳原子數1~16的胺甲醯基。具體而言,例如可列舉:甲基胺甲醯基、二甲基胺甲醯基、苯基胺甲醯基以及N-甲基-N-苯基胺甲醯基等。 The amine forminyl group represented by R 1 to R 8 may further have a monovalent substituent, preferably an amine formamidine group having a total carbon number of 1 to 30, and particularly preferably an amine formamidine group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms. Specific examples thereof include a methylamine methyl sulfonyl group, a dimethylamine methyl fluorenyl group, a phenylamine methyl fluorenyl group, and an N-methyl-N-phenylamine methyl fluorenyl group.

R1~R8所表示的胺磺醯基可進而具有1價取代基,較佳為總碳數0~30的態樣,尤佳為總碳數0~16的態樣。具體而言,例如可列舉:胺磺醯基、二甲基胺磺醯基以及二-(2-羥基乙基)胺磺醯基等。 The amine sulfonyl group represented by R 1 to R 8 may further have a monovalent substituent, preferably a total carbon number of 0 to 30, and particularly preferably a total carbon number of 0 to 16. Specific examples thereof include an aminesulfonyl group, a dimethylaminesulfonyl group, and a bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)aminesulfonyl group.

R1~R8所表示的芳基可進而具有1價取代基(雜環基除外),較佳為總碳數為6~30的芳基,尤佳為6~16的芳基。具體而言,例如可列舉:苯基、4-甲苯基、4-甲氧基苯基、2-氯苯基、3-(3-磺基丙基胺基)苯基、4-胺磺醯基、4-乙氧基乙基胺磺醯基以及3-二甲基胺甲醯基等。 The aryl group represented by R 1 to R 8 may further have a monovalent substituent (excluding a heterocyclic group), preferably an aryl group having a total carbon number of 6 to 30, particularly preferably an aryl group of 6 to 16. Specific examples thereof include a phenyl group, a 4-methylphenyl group, a 4-methoxyphenyl group, a 2-chlorophenyl group, a 3-(3-sulfopropylamino)phenyl group, and a 4-amine sulfonium oxime. A group, a 4-ethoxyethylamine sulfonyl group, a 3-dimethylaminecarbamyl group or the like.

R1~R8所表示的雜芳基具有於已述的芳基中取代有1價雜環基的結構。可於芳基中取代的1價雜環基可為飽和,亦可為不飽和,可列舉包含以下的芳香族雜環基且於環內包含氮原子、硫原子、氧原子等雜原子的任一者的基團,可進而具有取代基,較佳為總碳數1~30的雜環基,尤佳為1~15的雜環基。具體而言,例如可列舉:2-吡啶基、2-噻吩基、2-噻唑基、2-苯并噻唑基、 2-苯并噁唑基及2-呋喃基等。 The heteroaryl group represented by R 1 to R 8 has a structure in which a monovalent heterocyclic group is substituted with the above-mentioned aryl group. The monovalent heterocyclic group which may be substituted with an aryl group may be saturated or unsaturated, and examples thereof include the following aromatic heterocyclic group and include a hetero atom such as a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or an oxygen atom in the ring. The group of one may further have a substituent, and is preferably a heterocyclic group having a total carbon number of from 1 to 30, particularly preferably a heterocyclic group of from 1 to 15. Specific examples thereof include a 2-pyridyl group, a 2-thienyl group, a 2-thiazolyl group, a 2-benzothiazolyl group, a 2-benzoxazolyl group, and a 2-furyl group.

此外,具體而言,R1~R8可進而含有的1價取代基表示:鹵素原子、脂肪族基、芳基、雜環基、氰基、羧基、胺甲醯基、脂肪族氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、醯基、羥基、脂肪族氧基、芳氧基、醯氧基、胺甲醯氧基、雜環氧基、胺基、脂肪族胺基、芳基胺基、雜環胺基、醯基胺基、胺甲醯基胺基、胺磺醯基胺基、脂肪族氧基羰基胺基、芳氧基羰基胺基、脂肪族磺醯基胺基、芳基磺醯基胺基、硝基、脂肪族硫基、芳基硫基、脂肪族磺醯基、芳基磺醯基、胺磺醯基、磺基、醯亞胺基、或者雜環硫基,為脂肪族基、芳基、雜環基、氰基、胺甲醯基、脂肪族氧基羰基、芳氧基羰基、醯基、脂肪族氧基、芳氧基、脂肪族胺基、芳基胺基。 Further, specifically, R 1 to R 8 may further contain a monovalent substituent represented by a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a carboxyl group, an amine carbenyl group, or an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group. , aryloxycarbonyl, fluorenyl, hydroxy, aliphatic oxy, aryloxy, decyloxy, amine methyl methoxy, heterocyclic oxy, amine, aliphatic amine, aryl amine, heterocyclic Amine, mercaptoamine, amine, mercaptoamine, aminesulfonylamino, aliphatic oxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, aliphatic sulfonylamino, arylsulfonyl Amino, nitro, aliphatic thio, arylthio, aliphatic sulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, sulfonyl, sulfo, quinone, or heterocyclic thio, aliphatic A aryl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, an amine carbamoyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a fluorenyl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amine group, and an arylamine group.

對作為通式(I)或通式(II)所表示的化合物的結構而更佳的取代基進行說明。 A more preferable substituent of the structure of the compound represented by the formula (I) or the formula (II) will be described.

通式(I)中的R1、以及通式(II)中的R5較佳為烷基、芳基、氰基,烷基及芳基可進而具有1價取代基。此處,可導入至烷基及芳基中的取代基可列舉烷氧基、硫代烷氧基、氰基、以及鹵素原子等。 R 1 in the formula (I) and R 5 in the formula (II) are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a cyano group, and the alkyl group and the aryl group may further have a monovalent substituent. Here, examples of the substituent which can be introduced into the alkyl group and the aryl group include an alkoxy group, a thioalkoxy group, a cyano group, a halogen atom and the like.

R1及R5更佳為可列舉第三丁基、苯基、或者鄰甲基苯基。 More preferably, R 1 and R 5 are a third butyl group, a phenyl group or an o-methylphenyl group.

通式(I)中的R3更佳為氫原子,通式(I)及通式(II)中的R4較佳為氫原子、或者甲基,更佳為氫原子。通式(II)中的R6更佳為氫原子。 R 3 in the formula (I) is more preferably a hydrogen atom, and R 4 in the formula (I) and the formula (II) is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom. R 6 in the formula (II) is more preferably a hydrogen atom.

通式(I)及通式(II)中的R2、R7及R8分別可為氫原 子、烷基、烷氧基、烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺磺醯基、磺醯基胺基、羰基胺基、氰基、芳基、以及雜芳基的任一者,較佳為於其結構中具有選自取代烷基、PEO(聚環氧乙烷)鏈、PPO(聚環氧丙烷)鏈、銨鹽及聚合性基中的部分結構(部分結構A)的烷氧基羰基、胺甲醯基、胺磺醯基、磺醯基胺基、或者羰基胺基,更佳為具有部分結構A的磺醯基胺基。 R 2 , R 7 and R 8 in the general formula (I) and the general formula (II) may each independently be a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amine methyl sulfonyl group, an amine sulfonyl group or a sulfonyl group. Any one of a mercaptoamine group, a carbonylamino group, a cyano group, an aryl group, and a heteroaryl group preferably has a structure selected from the group consisting of a substituted alkyl group, a PEO (polyethylene oxide) chain, and a PPO ( a polyoxypropylene oxide) chain, an ammonium salt, and a partial structure (partial structure A) of an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amine methyl sulfonyl group, an amine sulfonyl group, a sulfonylamino group, or a carbonyl amine group. It is preferably a sulfonylamino group having a partial structure A.

通式(I)所表示的化合物中,於分子內存在多個的R2可彼此相同,亦可不同,較佳為在合成適應性方面相同。 In the compound represented by the formula (I), a plurality of R 2 present in the molecule may be the same or different from each other, and it is preferably the same in terms of synthesis suitability.

通式(I)所表示的化合物更佳為下述通式(IV)所表示的化合物,另外,通式(II)所表示的化合物更佳為下述通式(V)所表示的化合物的態樣。 The compound represented by the formula (I) is more preferably a compound represented by the following formula (IV), and the compound represented by the formula (II) is more preferably a compound represented by the following formula (V). Aspect.

通式(IV)中,R1、R3及R4分別與通式(I)中的R1、R3及R4含義相同,較佳例亦相同。 In the formula (IV), R 1 , R 3 and R 4 each have the same meanings as R 1 , R 3 and R 4 in the formula (I), and preferred examples are also the same.

R9及R11分別獨立地表示烷基、芳基、或者雜芳基,R10及R12分別獨立地表示氫原子、甲基或者乙基。 R 9 and R 11 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and R 10 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group.

R10及R12分別較佳為氫原子。 R 10 and R 12 are each preferably a hydrogen atom.

R9及R11分別較佳為經取代或未經取代的烷基,或者具有選自PEO(聚環氧乙烷)鏈、PPO(聚環氧丙烷)鏈、銨鹽、以及聚合性基中的部分結構的烷基、芳基、或者雜芳基,更佳為碳數2~8的烷基、或者於烷基鏈上具有甲基丙烯酸基的取代烷基。 R 9 and R 11 are each preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or have a PEO (polyethylene oxide) chain, a PPO (polypropylene oxide) chain, an ammonium salt, and a polymerizable group. The alkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group having a partial structure is more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms or a substituted alkyl group having a methacryl group at the alkyl chain.

通式(V)中,R4、R5及R6分別與通式(II)中的R4、R5及R6含義相同,較例亦相同。 In the general formula (V), R 4, R 5 and R 6 each 4, the same formula (II) in R R 5 and R 6 meaning Comparative Example are also the same.

R13及R15分別獨立地表示烷基、芳基、或者雜芳基,R14及R16分別獨立地表示氫原子、甲基或者乙基。 R 13 and R 15 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and R 14 and R 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group.

R14及R16分別較佳為氫原子。 R 14 and R 16 are each preferably a hydrogen atom.

R13及R15較佳為取代烷基,或者具有選自PEO(聚環氧乙烷)鏈、PPO(聚環氧丙烷)鏈、銨鹽、聚合性基中的部分結構的烷基、芳基、或者雜芳基,更佳為碳數2~8的烷基、或者於烷基鏈上具有甲基丙烯酸基的取代烷基。 R 13 and R 15 are preferably a substituted alkyl group or an alkyl group having a partial structure selected from the group consisting of a PEO (polyethylene oxide) chain, a PPO (polypropylene oxide) chain, an ammonium salt, and a polymerizable group. The group or the heteroaryl group is more preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms or a substituted alkyl group having a methacryl group group in the alkyl chain.

以下示出通式(I)或通式(II)所表示的化合物的具體例,但通式(I)或通式(II)所表示的化合物並不限定於以下的具體例。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (I) or the formula (II) are shown below, but the compound represented by the formula (I) or the formula (II) is not limited to the following specific examples.

通式(I)所表示的化合物、以及作為其較佳態樣的通式(IV)所表示的化合物的例子可列舉下述例示化合物(B-1)~例示化合物(B-9)、以及例示化合物(B-17)。通式(II)所表示的黃色染料、以及作為其較佳態樣的通式(V)所表示的黃色染料的例子分別可列舉下述例示化合物(B-10)、例示化合物(B-11)。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (I) and the compound represented by the formula (IV) which is a preferred embodiment thereof include the following exemplified compounds (B-1) to exemplified compounds (B-9), and An exemplified compound (B-17). Examples of the yellow dye represented by the formula (II) and the yellow dye represented by the formula (V) which is a preferred embodiment thereof include the following exemplified compounds (B-10) and exemplified compounds (B-11). ).

於本發明的綠色濾光片含有黃色染料的情況下,黃色染料相對於通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含有質量比[黃色染料的含有質量/通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含有質量]較佳為0.1~1.0,更佳為0.2~0.9,尤佳為0.4~0.9,特佳為0.5~0.8。 In the case where the green filter of the present invention contains a yellow dye, the mass ratio of the yellow dye to the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) [the mass of the yellow dye or the enthalpy represented by the formula (1) The content of the cyanine compound is preferably from 0.1 to 1.0, more preferably from 0.2 to 0.9, still more preferably from 0.4 to 0.9, and particularly preferably from 0.5 to 0.8.

<其他有色材料> <Other colored materials>

綠色濾光片亦可含有通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物以及視需要來使用的黃色染料以外的其他有色材料。 The green filter may contain a phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) and a colored material other than the yellow dye to be used as needed.

其他有色材料可使用染料或顏料等公知的有色材料。 As the other colored material, a known colored material such as a dye or a pigment can be used.

其他有色材料例如可使用日本專利特開2011-164564號公報的段落0053~段落0067等中記載的公知的有色材料。 As the other colored material, for example, a known colored material described in paragraphs 0053 to 0067 of JP-A-2011-164564 can be used.

染料可使用公知的染料。 As the dye, a known dye can be used.

公知的染料較佳為於有機溶劑中溶解所需量的染料,可根據所需的分光吸收來選擇適當的染料。 It is preferred that the dye be dissolved in an organic solvent in a desired amount, and an appropriate dye can be selected depending on the desired spectral absorption.

染料種類可列舉:酸性染料、鹼性染料、分散染料以及藉由酸性染料的與鹼性化合物的反應物、鹼性染料的與酸化合物的反 應物而可溶解於有機溶劑中的染料。 The types of dyes include acid dyes, basic dyes, disperse dyes, and reactants with basic compounds by acid dyes, and anti-acid compounds with basic dyes. A dye that is soluble in an organic solvent.

該些染料必須具有作為彩色濾光片而理想的光譜,且於後述的有機溶劑或者包含鹼可溶性樹脂的溶液中溶解所需的濃度,不會引起經時的析出、凝聚等。該些染料可自染料索引(Colour Index)中記載的C.I.溶劑染料(Solvent Colour)等中適當選定。另外,亦可自已知的油溶性染料、酸性染料、分散染料、反應性染料、直接染料等中選定溶劑溶解性與光譜適合的染料。 These dyes are required to have a desired spectrum as a color filter, and are dissolved in a solution required to be dissolved in an organic solvent or an alkali-soluble resin to be described later, without causing precipitation or aggregation over time. These dyes can be appropriately selected from C.I. Solvent Colours and the like described in the Colour Index. Further, a dye having a solvent solubility and a suitable spectrum may be selected from known oil-soluble dyes, acid dyes, disperse dyes, reactive dyes, direct dyes, and the like.

<著色組成物> <Coloring composition>

繼而,對適合於製作綠色濾光片的著色組成物進行說明。 Next, a coloring composition suitable for producing a green color filter will be described.

著色組成物含有所述的通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物、有機溶劑(以及較佳為黃色染料)。所述著色組成物可更含有其他有色材料。 The coloring composition contains the phthalocyanine compound represented by the above formula (1) and an organic solvent (and preferably a yellow dye). The colored composition may further comprise other colored materials.

綠色濾光片可藉由如下方法來製作,所述方法包括將所述著色組成物塗佈於支持體(基板)上而形成著色層的步驟。 The green filter can be produced by a method comprising the step of applying the colored composition onto a support (substrate) to form a colored layer.

更具體而言,所述方法可列舉公知的光微影法或者公知的乾式蝕刻法。 More specifically, the method may be a known photolithography method or a known dry etching method.

於光微影法的情況下,為了對所述著色組成物賦予感光性,而使所述著色組成物中含有例如聚合性化合物以及光聚合起始劑。以下,將該態樣的著色組成物亦稱為「感光性著色組成物」。 In the case of the photolithography method, in order to impart photosensitivity to the coloring composition, for example, a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator are contained in the coloring composition. Hereinafter, the coloring composition of this aspect is also referred to as "photosensitive coloring composition".

著色組成物的全部固體成分中的通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含量的較佳範圍與所述的綠色濾光片中的通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含量的較佳範圍相同。 The preferred range of the content of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) in the total solid content of the coloring composition is the same as the content of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) in the green filter. The preferred range is the same.

此處,所謂全部固體成分,是指除有機溶劑以外的全部成分。 Here, the term "all solid components" means all components other than the organic solvent.

於著色組成物含有黃色染料的情況下,著色組成物的全部固體成分中,黃色染料相對於通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含有質量比[黃色染料的含有質量/通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的含有質量]的較佳範圍與所述的綠色濾光片中的該含有質量比的較佳範圍相同。 In the case where the coloring composition contains a yellow dye, the mass ratio of the yellow dye to the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) among all the solid components of the coloring composition [the mass of the yellow dye/the formula (1) The preferred range of the content of the phthalocyanine compound represented by the above is the same as the preferred range of the mass ratio of the green filter.

(聚合性化合物) (polymerizable compound)

著色組成物(感光性著色組成物)含有聚合性化合物的至少1種。 The coloring composition (photosensitive coloring composition) contains at least one of polymerizable compounds.

聚合性化合物是出於如下目的而使用:利用藉由放射線的照射而由聚合起始劑產生的酸或者自由基,而被活化,與後述的鹼可溶性樹脂進行反應而產生交聯,或者藉由聚合性化合物自身相互鍵結或聚合而產生交聯,藉此使曝光部分於鹼顯影液中的溶解性下降,從而獲得著色圖案(彩色濾光片)。另外,視需要,出於在著色圖案形成後進行加熱而使著色圖案硬化的目的,聚合性化合物亦有用。 The polymerizable compound is used for the purpose of being activated by an acid or a radical generated by a polymerization initiator by irradiation with radiation, and reacting with an alkali-soluble resin to be described later to cause crosslinking, or by crosslinking. The polymerizable compounds themselves are bonded or polymerized to each other to cause crosslinking, whereby the solubility of the exposed portion in the alkali developing solution is lowered, thereby obtaining a colored pattern (color filter). Further, if necessary, a polymerizable compound is also useful for the purpose of curing the colored pattern after heating the colored pattern.

聚合性化合物只要是可藉由交聯、聚合反應而進行膜硬化的化合物,則並無特別限定。聚合性化合物例如可列舉:(a)環氧樹脂;(b)經選自羥甲基、烷氧基甲基、以及醯氧基甲基中的至少一種取代基所取代的甘脲化合物或者脲化合物;(c)經選自羥甲基、烷氧基甲基、以及醯氧基甲基中的至少一種取代基所取代的酚化合物;(d)聚合性單體化合物。 The polymerizable compound is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound which can be cured by crosslinking or polymerization. The polymerizable compound may, for example, be (a) an epoxy resin; (b) a glycoluril compound or urea substituted with at least one substituent selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a decyloxymethyl group; a compound; (c) a phenol compound substituted with at least one substituent selected from the group consisting of a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a decyloxymethyl group; (d) a polymerizable monomer compound.

所述(a)~(c)的化合物例如可適當參照日本專利特開2006-343598號公報的段落0069~段落0084的記載。 For example, the compounds of the above (a) to (c) can be referred to, for example, paragraphs 0069 to 0084 of JP-A-2006-343598.

所述(d)聚合性單體化合物較佳為具有1個可加成聚合的乙烯基且於常壓下具有100℃以上的沸點的乙烯性不飽和基的化合物。 The (d) polymerizable monomer compound is preferably a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group having an addition polymerizable vinyl group and having a boiling point of 100 ° C or higher at normal pressure.

所述(d)聚合性單體化合物的例子可列舉:聚乙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯等單官能的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(丙烯醯氧基丙基)醚、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異氰脲酸酯、於甘油或三羥甲基乙烷等多官能醇中加成環氧乙烷或環氧丙烷後進行(甲基)丙烯酸酯化而成的化合物;如日本專利特公昭48-41708號、日本專利特公昭50-6034號、日本專利特開昭51-37193號各公報中所記載的丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類,日本專利特開昭48-64183號、日本專利特公昭49-43191號、日本專利特公昭52-30490號各公報中記載的聚酯丙烯酸酯類,環氧樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸的反應產物即環氧丙烯酸酯類等多官能的丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯等。進而可列舉「日本黏接協會會誌」第20卷第7期第300~308頁中作為光硬化性單體以 及寡聚物來介紹的化合物。 Examples of the (d) polymerizable monomer compound include monofunctional groups such as polyethylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono(meth)acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate. Acrylate or methacrylate; polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolethane tri(meth)acrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol three ( Methyl) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra(meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth) acrylate, hexane diol (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tris(propylene oxypropyl) ether And tris(propyleneoxyethyl)isocyanurate, which is added to ethylene oxide or propylene oxide in a polyfunctional alcohol such as glycerin or trimethylolethane, and then (meth)acrylated The urethane amides described in each of the Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho-48-41708, the Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho. Polyester C described in each of the publications of Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 49-43191, Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 52-30490 The enoate ester, a reaction product of an epoxy resin and (meth)acrylic acid, or a polyfunctional acrylate or methacrylate such as an epoxy acrylate. Further, as a photocurable monomer, "Japan Adhesive Society", Vol. 20, No. 7, pp. 300-308 And oligomers to introduce compounds.

聚合性化合物可單獨使用,亦可將2種以上組合使用。 The polymerizable compound may be used singly or in combination of two or more.

感光性著色組成物的全部固體成分中的聚合性化合物的含量較佳為1質量%~70質量%,更佳為5質量%~50質量%,特佳為7質量%~30質量%。 The content of the polymerizable compound in all the solid components of the photosensitive coloring composition is preferably from 1% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably from 5% by mass to 50% by mass, even more preferably from 7% by mass to 30% by mass.

(聚合起始劑) (polymerization initiator)

著色組成物(感光性著色組成物)含有光聚合起始劑的至少1種。 The coloring composition (photosensitive coloring composition) contains at least one of photopolymerization initiators.

於將著色組成物製成負型的感光性著色組成物的情況下,該負型感光性著色組成物包含光聚合起始劑。 In the case where the colored composition is a negative photosensitive coloring composition, the negative photosensitive coloring composition contains a photopolymerization initiator.

另外,光聚合起始劑亦可進而含有於包含萘醌二疊氮化合物的正型著色組成物中,該情況下,於圖案形成後可進一步促進該圖案的硬化度。 Further, the photopolymerization initiator may be further contained in a positive coloring composition containing a naphthoquinonediazide compound. In this case, the degree of hardening of the pattern can be further promoted after pattern formation.

所述光聚合起始劑只要是可藉由曝光而引發聚合性化合物的交聯反應或聚合反應的化合物,則並無特別限定,較佳為根據特性、引發效率、吸收波長、獲取性、成本、安全性等觀點來選擇。例如可列舉:選自鹵代甲基噁二唑化合物及鹵代甲基-均三嗪化合物中的至少一種活性鹵素化合物、3-芳基取代香豆素化合物、咯吩二聚物、二苯甲酮化合物、苯乙酮化合物及其衍生物、環戊二烯-苯-鐵錯合物及其鹽、肟系化合物等。 The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can initiate a crosslinking reaction or a polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound by exposure, and is preferably based on characteristics, initiation efficiency, absorption wavelength, availability, and cost. , security and other perspectives to choose. For example, at least one active halogen compound selected from the group consisting of a halogenated methyl oxadiazole compound and a halogenated methyl-s-triazine compound, a 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compound, a horn-order dimer, and a diphenyl group A ketone compound, an acetophenone compound and a derivative thereof, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex compound, a salt thereof, a quinone compound, and the like.

光聚合起始劑例如可適當參照日本專利特開2004-295116號公報的段落0070~段落0079的記載。 The photopolymerization initiator can be referred to, for example, the description of paragraphs 0070 to 0079 of JP-A-2004-295116.

光聚合起始劑較佳為肟系化合物(以下亦稱為肟系光聚合起始劑)。 The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a quinone compound (hereinafter also referred to as an oxime photopolymerization initiator).

肟系光聚合起始劑並無特別限定,例如可列舉日本專利特開2000-80068號公報、WO02/100903A1、日本專利特開2001-233842號公報等中記載的肟化合物。 The oxime-based photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an anthracene compound described in JP-A-2000-80068, WO02/100903A1, and JP-A-2001-233842.

具體例可列舉:2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-丁二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-戊二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-己二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-庚二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-辛二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(甲基苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-丁二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(乙基苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-丁二酮、2-(O-苯甲醯基肟)-1-[4-(丁基苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-丁二酮、1-(O-乙醯基肟)-1-[9-乙基-6-(2-甲基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]乙酮、1-(O-乙醯基肟)-1-[9-甲基-6-(2-甲基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]乙酮、1-(O-乙醯基肟)-1-[9-丙基-6-(2-甲基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]乙酮、1-(O-乙醯基肟)-1-[9-乙基-6-(2-乙基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]乙酮、1-(O-乙醯基肟)-1-[9-乙基-6-(2-丁基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]乙酮、2-(苯甲醯氧基亞胺基)-1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1-辛酮、2-(乙醯氧基亞胺基)-4-(4-氯苯硫基)-1-[9-乙基-6-(2-甲基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]-1-丁酮等。 Specific examples thereof include 2-(O-benzylidene fluorenyl)-1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-butanedione and 2-(O-benzoguanidinopurine). 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-pentanedione, 2-(O-benzylidene fluorenyl)-1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1 ,2-hexanedione, 2-(O-benzylidene fluorenyl)-1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-heptanedione, 2-(O-benzylidene fluorenyl)肟)-1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-octanedione, 2-(O-benzylidene fluorenyl)-1-[4-(methylphenylthio)benzene -1,2-butanedione, 2-(O-benzylidene fluorenyl)-1-[4-(ethylphenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-butanedione, 2-( O-benzylidene hydrazide)-1-[4-(butylphenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-butanedione, 1-(O-ethylindenyl)-1-[9-B -6-(2-methylbenzhydryl)-9H-indazol-3-yl]ethanone, 1-(O-ethylindenyl)-1-[9-methyl-6-(2 -methylbenzhydryl)-9H-indazol-3-yl]ethanone, 1-(O-ethylindenyl)-1-[9-propyl-6-(2-methylbenzhydrazide -9H-carbazol-3-yl]ethanone, 1-(O-ethylindenyl)-1-[9-ethyl-6-(2-ethylbenzylidene)-9H-indole Zyrid-3-yl]ethanone, 1-(O-ethylindenyl)-1-[9-ethyl-6-(2-butylbenzylidene)-9H-indazol-3-yl] Ethylketone, 2-(benzylideneoxyimido)-1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1-octyl 2-(Ethyloxyimino)-4-(4-chlorophenylthio)-1-[9-ethyl-6-(2-methylbenzylidene)-9H-carbazole- 3-yl]-1-butanone and the like.

另外,亦可使用日本專利特開2009-244692號公報的段落0077~段落0168中記載的肟系光聚合起始劑。 Further, the oxime-based photopolymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0077 to 0168 of JP-A-2009-244692 can also be used.

相對於聚合性化合物,感光性著色組成物中的光聚合起始劑的含量較佳為0.01質量%~50質量%,更佳為1質量%~30質量%,特佳為1質量%~20質量%。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photosensitive coloring composition is preferably from 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably from 1% by mass to 30% by mass, particularly preferably from 1% by mass to 20%, based on the polymerizable compound. quality%.

(有機溶劑) (Organic solvents)

著色組成物含有有機溶劑的至少1種。 The coloring composition contains at least one of organic solvents.

有機溶劑只要是溶解通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物(以及視需要使用的黃色染料)者,則不論種類如何均可使用。 The organic solvent can be used regardless of the type as long as it dissolves the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) (and a yellow dye if necessary).

有機溶劑可使用酯化合物、醚化合物、酮化合物等。 As the organic solvent, an ester compound, an ether compound, a ketone compound or the like can be used.

有機溶劑例如可使用日本專利特開2013-160921號公報的段落0090~段落0093中記載的有機溶劑。 As the organic solvent, for example, an organic solvent described in paragraphs 0090 to 0093 of JP-A-2013-160921 can be used.

有機溶劑較佳為:3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、乙基溶纖劑乙酸酯、乳酸乙酯、二乙二醇二甲基醚、乙酸丁酯、乙酸環己酯、3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、2-庚酮、環己酮、乙基卡必醇乙酸酯、丁基卡必醇乙酸酯、丙二醇單甲醚、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯等。 The organic solvent is preferably: methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyrate Ester, cyclohexyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol Monomethyl ether acetate and the like.

(界面活性劑) (surfactant)

著色組成物可含有界面活性劑的至少1種。 The coloring composition may contain at least one of a surfactant.

界面活性劑可使用氟系界面活性劑、非離子系界面活性劑、陽離子系界面活性劑、陰離子系界面活性劑、矽酮系界面活性劑的各種界面活性劑。 As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and an anthrone-based surfactant can be used.

尤其藉由含有氟系界面活性劑,可進一步提高製成塗佈液時的液特性(特別是流動性),可進一步改善塗佈厚度的均勻性或省 液性。 In particular, by containing a fluorine-based surfactant, liquid characteristics (particularly fluidity) at the time of forming a coating liquid can be further improved, and uniformity or province of coating thickness can be further improved. Liquid.

界面活性劑例如可適當使用日本專利特開2011-202025號公報的段落0172~段落0175中記載的界面活性劑。 As the surfactant, for example, the surfactant described in paragraphs 0172 to 0175 of JP-A-2011-202025 can be suitably used.

氟系界面活性劑的市售品例如可列舉:美佳法(Megafac)F171、美佳法(Megafac)F172、美佳法(Megafac)F173、美佳法(Megafac)F176、美佳法(Megafac)F177、美佳法(Megafac)F141、美佳法(Megafac)F142、美佳法(Megafac)F143、美佳法(Megafac)F144、美佳法(Megafac)R30、美佳法(Megafac)F437、美佳法(Megafac)F479、美佳法(Megafac)F482、美佳法(Megafac)F554、美佳法(Megafac)F780、美佳法(Megafac)F781(以上由迪愛生(DIC)(股)製造),弗拉德(Fluorad)FC430、弗拉德(Fluorad)FC431、弗拉德(Fluorad)FC171(以上由住友3M(股)製造),沙福隆(Surflon)S-382、沙福隆(Surflon)SC-101、沙福隆(Surflon)SC-103、沙福隆(Surflon)SC-104、沙福隆(Surflon)SC-105、沙福隆(Surflon)SC1068、沙福隆(Surflon)SC-381、沙福隆(Surflon)SC-383、沙福隆(Surflon)S393、沙福隆(Surflon)KH-40(以上由旭硝子(股)製造),索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)20000(捷利康(Zeneca)公司製造)等。 Commercial products of the fluorine-based surfactant include, for example, Megafac F171, Megafac F172, Megafac F173, Megafac F176, Megafac F177, and Meijiafa. (Megafac) F141, Megafac F142, Megafac F143, Megafac F144, Megafac R30, Megafac F437, Megafac F479, Meijiafa ( Megafac) F482, Megafac F554, Megafac F780, Megafac F781 (made by Di Aisheng (DIC)), Fluorad FC430, Vlad ( Fluorad) FC431, Fluorad FC171 (made by Sumitomo 3M (share)), Surflon S-382, Surflon SC-101, Surflon SC- 103, Surflon SC-104, Surflon SC-105, Surflon SC1068, Surflon SC-381, Surflon SC-383, Surflon S393, Surflon KH-40 (made by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Zeneca), etc.

(分散劑) (Dispersant)

著色組成物可含有分散劑的至少1種。 The coloring composition may contain at least one of dispersing agents.

分散劑可列舉日本專利特開2012-162684號公報的段落0187~段落0237號公報中記載的高分子分散劑。 The dispersing agent is a polymer dispersing agent described in paragraphs 0187 to 0237 of JP-A-2012-162684.

分散劑的市售品例如可列舉:畢克化學(BYK Chemie)公司製造的迪斯帕畢克(Disperbyk)系列(例如:迪斯帕畢克(Disperbyk)-161、迪斯帕畢克(Disperbyk)-171、迪斯帕畢克(Disperbyk)-174、迪斯帕畢克(Disperbyk)-2000、迪斯帕畢克(Disperbyk)-2001等),埃夫卡(EFKA)公司製造的埃夫卡(EFKA)系列(例如:埃夫卡(EFKA)4330、埃夫卡(EFKA)4340等),日本路博潤(Lubrizol)公司製造的索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)系列(例如:索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)3000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)5500、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)24000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)17000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)27000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)28000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)32000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)38500、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)39000、索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)55000等)等。 Commercial products of the dispersant include, for example, the Disperbyk series manufactured by BYK Chemie Co., Ltd. (for example, Disperbyk-161, Disperbyk (Disperbyk) ) -171, Disperbyk-174, Disperbyk-2000, Disperbyk-2001, etc., Eve, manufactured by EFKA EFKA series (eg EFKA 4330, EFKA 4340, etc.), Solsperse series manufactured by Lubrizol, Japan (eg Sol Solsperse 3000, Solsperse 5500, Solsperse 24000, Solsperse 17000, Solsperse 27000, Sol Solsperse 28000, Solsperse 32000, Solsperse 38500, Solsperse 39000, Solsperse 55000, etc. .

(鹼可溶性樹脂) (alkali soluble resin)

著色組成物可含有鹼可溶性樹脂的至少1種。 The coloring composition may contain at least one of alkali-soluble resins.

鹼可溶性樹脂較佳為線狀有機高分子聚合物,且可溶於有機溶劑中、可以弱鹼水溶液進行顯影者。此種線狀有機高分子聚合物可列舉側鏈上具有羧酸的聚合物,例如:日本專利特開昭59-44615號、日本專利特公昭54-34327號、日本專利特公昭58-12577號、日本專利特公昭54-25957號、日本專利特開昭59-53836號、日本專利特開昭59-71048號的各公報中所記載的甲基丙烯酸共聚物、丙烯酸共聚物、衣康酸共聚物、丁烯酸共聚物、 順丁烯二酸共聚物、部分酯化順丁烯二酸共聚物等,另外,同樣可使用於側鏈上具有羧酸的酸性纖維素衍生物。 The alkali-soluble resin is preferably a linear organic high molecular polymer, and is soluble in an organic solvent and can be developed by a weak alkali aqueous solution. Examples of such a linear organic polymer include a polymer having a carboxylic acid in a side chain, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-44615, Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 54-34327, and Japanese Patent Publication No. Sho 58-12577 The methacrylic acid copolymer, the acrylic copolymer, and the itaconic acid copolymer described in each of the publications of Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. Sho 59-25957, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-53836, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-71048 , butenoic acid copolymer, A maleic acid copolymer, a partially esterified maleic acid copolymer or the like can be used similarly to an acidic cellulose derivative having a carboxylic acid in a side chain.

鹼可溶性樹脂例如可適當使用日本專利特開2005-266149號公報的段落0049~段落0058中記載的樹脂。 As the alkali-soluble resin, for example, the resin described in paragraphs 0049 to 0058 of JP-A-2005-266149 can be suitably used.

(其他成分) (other ingredients)

著色組成物可視需要而含有其他成分。 The coloring composition may contain other components as needed.

其他成分可列舉於側鏈上具有雜環的高分子化合物。於側鏈上具有雜環的高分子化合物例如可列舉日本專利特開2012-162684號公報的段落0146~段落0175號公報中記載的高分子化合物。 Other components include a polymer compound having a hetero ring in a side chain. The polymer compound having a heterocyclic ring in the side chain is, for example, a polymer compound described in paragraphs 0146 to 0175 of JP-A-2012-162684.

另外,例如於將著色組成物製成正型感光性著色組成物的情況下,著色組成物較佳為含有萘醌二疊氮化合物的至少1種作為其他成分。 Further, for example, when the colored composition is a positive photosensitive coloring composition, the colored composition preferably contains at least one of a naphthoquinonediazide compound as another component.

萘醌二疊氮化合物例如可適當使用日本專利特開2005-266149號公報的段落0060~段落0061中記載的化合物。 As the naphthoquinonediazide compound, for example, a compound described in paragraphs 0060 to 0061 of JP-A-2005-266149 can be suitably used.

另外,其他成分可列舉:有機羧酸、熱聚合防止劑、填充劑、所述以外的高分子化合物、密接促進劑、抗氧化劑、紫外線吸收劑、凝聚防止劑等。 In addition, examples of the other components include an organic carboxylic acid, a thermal polymerization inhibitor, a filler, a polymer compound other than the above, an adhesion promoter, an antioxidant, an ultraviolet absorber, and a coagulation inhibitor.

該些成分例如可列舉日本專利特開2011-202025號公報的段落0176~段落0177、日本專利特開2004-295116號公報的段落0155~段落0156中記載的成分。 Examples of such components include those described in paragraphs 0176 to 0177 of JP-A-2011-202025, and paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2004-295116.

另外,著色組成物可含有日本專利特開2004-295116號公報的 段落0078中記載的增感劑或光穩定劑、日本專利特開2004-295116號公報的段落0081中記載的熱聚合防止劑。 In addition, the coloring composition may contain the Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-295116 The sensitizer or light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078, and the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of JP-A-2004-295116.

以上,已對適合於製作綠色濾光片的著色組成物進行說明。 The coloring composition suitable for producing a green color filter has been described above.

以上的著色組成物可藉由變更所含有的有色材料的種類(色相),而亦適合於製作紅色濾光片或藍色濾光片。 The above coloring composition can also be adapted to produce a red color filter or a blue color filter by changing the type (hue) of the colored material contained therein.

<綠色濾光片的製造方法> <Method of Manufacturing Green Filter>

綠色濾光片的較佳製造方法可列舉光微影法。 A preferred method of manufacturing the green filter is a photolithography method.

利用光微影法的綠色濾光片的製造方法為包括以下步驟的製造方法:著色層步驟,將已述的感光性著色組成物賦予至基板上而形成著色層;曝光步驟,將所形成的著色層(較佳為隔著遮罩而)曝光為圖案狀;以及對經曝光的著色層進行顯影而獲得著色圖案(綠色濾光片)的步驟。 The method for producing a green filter using the photolithography method is a manufacturing method including a coloring layer step of applying a photosensitive coloring composition described above to a substrate to form a coloring layer, and an exposure step of forming the formed coloring layer. The colored layer (preferably via a mask) is exposed to a pattern; and the step of developing the exposed colored layer to obtain a colored pattern (green filter).

所述製造方法較佳為更包括:對所述著色圖案照射紫外線的步驟;以及對經照射紫外線的著色圖案進行加熱處理的步驟。 Preferably, the manufacturing method further includes a step of irradiating the colored pattern with ultraviolet rays, and a step of heat-treating the colored pattern irradiated with ultraviolet rays.

綠色濾光片的製造方法例如可適當參照日本專利特開2011-202025號公報的段落0210~段落0239中記載的方法等公知的方法。 For the method of producing the green filter, for example, a known method such as the method described in paragraphs 0210 to 0239 of JP-A-2011-202025 can be appropriately referred to.

另外,除了光微影法以外,綠色濾光片亦可利用以下方法來製造:日本專利特開2009-116078號公報中記載的轉印法、日本專利特開2009-134263號公報中記載的噴墨法、日本專利特開2006-343598號公報中記載的乾式蝕刻法等。 In addition to the photolithography method, the green filter can be produced by the following method: the transfer method described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2009-116078, and the spray described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2009-134263 A dry etching method or the like described in JP-A-2006-343598.

此外,紅色濾光片或藍色濾光片當然亦可以與綠色濾光片相同的方式來製造。 In addition, the red filter or the blue filter can of course be manufactured in the same manner as the green filter.

<液晶顯示裝置、有機EL顯示裝置> <Liquid crystal display device, organic EL display device>

本發明的顯示裝置的態樣較佳為包括所述一次光源、所述光轉換部、以及包含所述綠色濾光片的圖像顯示面板的態樣。 The aspect of the display device of the present invention preferably includes the first light source, the light conversion portion, and an image display panel including the green filter.

圖像顯示面板較佳為更包括紅色濾光片以及藍色濾光片。 Preferably, the image display panel further includes a red filter and a blue filter.

另外,所述圖像顯示面板較佳為液晶顯示面板或者有機EL面板。 Further, the image display panel is preferably a liquid crystal display panel or an organic EL panel.

即,本發明的顯示裝置較佳為液晶顯示裝置或者有機EL顯示裝置。 That is, the display device of the present invention is preferably a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device.

關於液晶顯示裝置、有機EL顯示裝置的定義或各顯示裝置的詳情,例如記載於「電子顯示器件(佐佐木昭夫著,工業調査會(股)1990年發行)」、「顯示器件(伊吹順章著,產業圖書(股)1989年發行)」等中。另外,關於液晶顯示裝置,例如記載於「下一代液晶顯示器技術(內田龍男編輯,工業調査會(股)1994年發行)」中。對本發明可應用的液晶顯示裝置並無特別限制,例如可應用於所述「下一代液晶顯示器技術」中記載的多種方式的液晶顯示裝置。 The definition of the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device or the details of each display device are described, for example, in "Electronic display devices (sasaki Sasaki, Industrial Research Association, issued in 1990)", "Display devices (Ibuki Shunzhang) , Industrial Books (shares issued in 1989)" and so on. In addition, the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, "Next-Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (Editor Uchida Natsuo, Industrial Research Association, Ltd., 1994)". The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention is applicable is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, a plurality of types of liquid crystal display devices described in the "next-generation liquid crystal display technology".

其中,本發明中的綠色濾光片對於彩色TFT方式的液晶顯示裝置特別有效。關於彩色TFT方式的液晶顯示裝置,例如記載於「彩色TFT液晶顯示器(共立出版(股)1996年發行)」中。進而,本發明亦可應用於共面切換(In Plane Switching,IPS)等 橫向電場驅動方式、多域垂直配向(Multi-domain Vertical Alignment,MVA)等畫素分割方式等視角擴大的液晶顯示裝置、或超扭轉向列(Super Twisted Nematic,STN)、扭轉向列(Twisted Nematic,TN)、垂直配向(Vertical Alignment,VA)、光學補償傾斜(Optically Compensated Splay,OCS)、邊緣場切換(Fringe Field Switching,FFS)及反射光學補償彎曲(Reflective Optically Compensated Bend,R-OCB)等。 Among them, the green color filter of the present invention is particularly effective for a color TFT liquid crystal display device. A liquid crystal display device of a color TFT type is described, for example, in "Color TFT Liquid Crystal Display (Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd., 1996)". Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to In Plane Switching (IPS), etc. A liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle such as a horizontal electric field driving method or a multi-domain vertical alignment (MVA), or a super twisted nematic (STN) or a twisted nematic (Twisted Nematic) , TN), Vertical Alignment (VA), Optically Compensated Splay (OCS), Fringe Field Switching (FFS), and Reflective Optically Compensated Bend (R-OCB) .

另外,本發明的綠色濾光片亦可供於明亮且高精細的彩色濾光片陣列(Color-filter On Array,COA)方式。 In addition, the green filter of the present invention is also available in a bright and high-definition Color-filter On Array (COA) mode.

於將公知的冷陰極管螢光燈(Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp,CCFL)作為背光的情況下,本發明的包括綠色濾光片的液晶顯示裝置可獲得高的亮度以及高的色再現性。 In the case where a known Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used as a backlight, the liquid crystal display device including the green filter of the present invention can attain high brightness and high color reproducibility.

然而,所述液晶顯示裝置藉由將紅色、綠色及藍色的LED光源(RGB-LED),特佳為藍色LED作為背光,可獲得與有機EL顯示裝置相當的程度的極高的亮度以及極高的色再現性。 However, the liquid crystal display device can obtain extremely high brightness corresponding to an organic EL display device by using red, green, and blue LED light sources (RGB-LEDs), particularly blue LEDs as backlights. Extremely high color reproducibility.

[實施例] [Examples]

以下,藉由實施例來對本發明進一步進行具體說明,但只要不超出本發明的主旨,則本發明並不限定於以下的實施例。此外,只要無特別說明,則「%」以及「份」為質量基準。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described by way of examples, but the present invention is not limited to the following examples without departing from the spirit of the invention. In addition, "%" and "parts" are quality standards unless otherwise specified.

<酞菁化合物的準備> <Preparation of phthalocyanine compounds>

分別準備已述的例示化合物A-1、例示化合物A-10、例示化合物A-39、例示化合物A-40、例示化合物A-41、例示化合物A-47、 例示化合物A-48、例示化合物A-67、例示化合物A-68、例示化合物A-77、例示化合物A-78、例示化合物A-85、例示化合物A-86、例示化合物A-91、例示化合物A-92,來作為通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物。 The exemplified compound A-1, the exemplified compound A-10, the exemplified compound A-39, the exemplified compound A-40, the exemplified compound A-41, and the exemplified compound A-47 are prepared separately. Exemplary Compound A-48, exemplified compound A-67, exemplified compound A-68, exemplified compound A-77, exemplified compound A-78, exemplified compound A-85, exemplified compound A-86, exemplified compound A-91, exemplified compound A-92 is a phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1).

另外,分別準備下述化合物C-1、C.I.Pig.Green 58(C.I.顏料綠58,以下亦稱為「PG58」)、以及C.I.Pig.Green 36(C.I.顏料綠36,以下亦稱為「PG36」),來作為比較的酞菁化合物。 Further, the following compounds C-1, CIPig. Green 58 (CI Pigment Green 58, hereinafter referred to as "PG58"), and CIPig. Green 36 (CI Pigment Green 36, hereinafter also referred to as "PG36") were prepared. ), as a comparative phthalocyanine compound.

[實施例1] [Example 1]

<感光性著色組成物S1的製備> <Preparation of photosensitive coloring composition S1>

將下述組成的各成分進行混合來製備作為綠色組成物的感光性著色組成物S1。 The photosensitive coloring composition S1 which is a green composition was prepared by mixing each component of the following composition.

-感光性著色組成物S1的組成- - Composition of photosensitive coloring composition S1 -

.酞菁化合物(例示化合物A-1)…4.8份 . Phthalocyanine compound (exemplified compound A-1) ... 4.8 parts

.分散劑(日本路博潤(Lubrizol)公司製造的索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)5500)…2.3份 . Dispersant (Solsperse 5500, manufactured by Lubrizol, Japan)...2.3 parts

.有機溶劑(丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯)…84.0份 . Organic solvent (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate)...84.0 parts

.氟系界面活性劑(迪愛生(DIC)公司製造的美佳法(Megafac)F554)…0.02份 . Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafac F554) made by DiCai (DIC)...0.02 parts

.聚合性化合物(二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(日本化藥(股)製造))…4.3份 . Polymeric compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.))...4.3 parts

.光聚合起始劑(OXE-01(巴斯夫(BASF)公司製造))…1.4份 . Photopolymerization initiator (OXE-01 (manufactured by BASF)) 1.4 parts

.黃色染料(下述化合物H1,與所述的例示化合物B-1相同的化合物)…3.2份 . Yellow dye (the following compound H1, the same compound as the above-exemplified compound B-1)...3.2 parts

<帶有綠色濾光片的基板的製作> <Production of Substrate with Green Filter>

利用旋轉塗佈機,以乾燥膜厚成為2.0μm的方式,將所述獲得的感光性著色組成物S1塗佈於10cm×10cm的玻璃基板(康寧(Corning)公司製造的「康寧(Corning)1737」,厚度為0.7mm)上,使其乾燥,藉此在所述玻璃基板上形成塗膜。 The obtained photosensitive coloring composition S1 was applied to a glass substrate of 10 cm × 10 cm by a spin coater so that the dried film thickness was 2.0 μm (Corning 1737, manufactured by Corning). The thickness was 0.7 mm) and dried to form a coating film on the glass substrate.

繼而,對形成有塗膜的玻璃基板整個面照射100mJ/cm2的紫外線,以鹼顯影液進行顯影後,於230℃下在烘箱中進行30分鐘後烘烤(post-baking)。藉此,使所述塗膜硬化而製成綠色濾光片。 Then, the entire surface of the glass substrate on which the coating film was formed was irradiated with ultraviolet rays of 100 mJ/cm 2 , developed with an alkali developing solution, and then post-baking in an oven at 230 ° C for 30 minutes. Thereby, the coating film is cured to form a green filter.

藉由以上,獲得帶有綠色濾光片的基板。 From the above, a substrate with a green filter was obtained.

<色度值的測定> <Measurement of chromaticity value>

(使用藍色LED及YAG螢光體的情況下的色度值的測定) (Measurement of chromaticity value in the case of using blue LED and YAG phosphor)

將市售的液晶顯示裝置(明基(BenQ)公司製造,商品名V2200)分解,取出背光單元(藍色LED+YAG螢光體類型)。 A commercially available liquid crystal display device (manufactured by BenQ Corporation, trade name V2200) was decomposed, and a backlight unit (blue LED + YAG phosphor type) was taken out.

於該背光單元上配置所述帶有綠色濾光片的基板。 The substrate with a green color filter is disposed on the backlight unit.

繼而,使背光單元運作,使由藍色LED及YAG螢光體產生的光(來自藍色LED的藍色光藉由YAG螢光體轉換而成的白色光)透射過帶有綠色濾光片的基板,測定透射過帶有綠色濾光片的基板的綠色光的色度值(x、y、Y)。利用拓普康(Topcon)公司製造的「BM-5」來進行色度值(x、y、Y)的測定。 Then, the backlight unit is operated such that light generated by the blue LED and the YAG phosphor (white light from the blue LED converted by the YAG phosphor) is transmitted through the green filter. The substrate measures the chromaticity values (x, y, Y) of the green light transmitted through the substrate with the green filter. The chromaticity values (x, y, and Y) were measured using "BM-5" manufactured by Topcon Corporation.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

(使用藍色LED及量子點的情況下的色度值的測定) (Measurement of chromaticity values in the case of using blue LEDs and quantum dots)

將市售的液晶顯示裝置(索尼公司製造,商品名KDL46W900A)分解,取出背光單元(藍色LED+Color IQTM)。 Commercially available liquid crystal display devices (Sony Corporation, trade name KDL46W900A) decompose, remove the backlight unit (blue LED + Color IQ TM).

此處,Color IQTM為量子點圖像(QD Vision)公司製造的量子點構件,是分散有作為量子點G的CdZnSeS奈米粒子以及作為量子點R的CdZnSeS奈米粒子的樹脂被封入玻璃箱中的結構的構件。 Here, Color IQ TM is a quantum dot member manufactured by QD Vision, and a resin in which CdZnSeS nanoparticle as quantum dot G and CdZnSeS nanoparticle as quantum dot R are dispersed is sealed in a glass case. The components of the structure.

於所述背光單元上配置所述帶有綠色濾光片的基板。 The substrate with a green color filter is disposed on the backlight unit.

繼而,使背光單元運作,使由藍色LED及Color IQ產生的光(來自藍色LED的藍色光藉由Color IQTM轉換而成的白色光)透射過帶有綠色濾光片的基板,測定透射過帶有綠色濾光片的基板的光的色度值(x、y、Y)。利用拓普康(Topcon)公司製造的「BM-5」來進行色度值(x、y、Y)的測定。 Then, the operation of the backlight unit, the light (the blue light from the blue LED by Color IQ TM converted from white light) generated by the blue LED is transmitted through the substrate and Color IQ with a green filter, measured The chromaticity value (x, y, Y) of light transmitted through the substrate with the green filter. The chromaticity values (x, y, and Y) were measured using "BM-5" manufactured by Topcon Corporation.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

(△Y的算出) (calculation of △Y)

自藉由使用藍色LED及量子點的情況下的色度值的測定而獲得的Y中,減去藉由使用LED及YAG螢光體的情況下的色度值的測定而獲得的Y,藉此求出△Y。 Y obtained by measurement of a chromaticity value in the case of using a blue LED and a quantum dot, minus Y obtained by measurement of a chromaticity value in the case of using an LED and a YAG phosphor, Thereby, ΔY is obtained.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

此處,色度值中的Y越大,表示綠色光的亮度越高。 Here, the larger the Y in the chromaticity value, the higher the luminance of the green light.

另外,△Y越大,表示因使用量子點而帶來的亮度提高的效果越大。 Further, the larger the ΔY, the greater the effect of improving the brightness due to the use of quantum dots.

[實施例2~實施例15] [Example 2 to Example 15]

除了將例示化合物A-1變更為下述表1所示的例示化合物以外,以與實施例1相同的方式來製作帶有綠色濾光片的基板,對所製作的帶有綠色濾光片的基板進行與實施例1相同的評價。 A substrate with a green filter was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the exemplified compound A-1 was changed to the exemplified compound shown in Table 1 below, and the prepared green filter was used. The substrate was subjected to the same evaluation as in Example 1.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

[比較例1] [Comparative Example 1]

除了將例示化合物A-1變更為所述化合物C-1以外,以與實施例1相同的方式來製作帶有綠色濾光片的基板,對所製作的帶有綠色濾光片的基板進行與實施例1相同的評價。 A substrate with a green filter was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the exemplified compound A-1 was changed to the compound C-1, and the prepared substrate with a green filter was subjected to The same evaluation as in Example 1.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

[比較例2] [Comparative Example 2]

除了將感光性著色組成物S1變更為以下的比較用感光性著色組成物1以外,以與實施例1相同的方式來製作帶有綠色濾光片的基板,對所製作的帶有綠色濾光片的基板進行與實施例1相同的評價。 A substrate with a green filter was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive coloring composition S1 was changed to the following comparative photosensitive coloring composition 1 in the same manner as in Example 1. The substrate of the sheet was subjected to the same evaluation as in Example 1.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

<比較用感光性著色組成物1的製備> <Preparation of photosensitive coloring composition 1 for comparison>

將丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯(75份)、作為綠色顏料的PG58(17份)、以及分散劑(日本路博潤(Lubrizol)公司製造的索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)5500)(8份)進行混合,以攪拌機來攪拌3小時而製備固體成分濃度為25%的色漿(mill base)。對該色漿,使用600份的0.5mmΦ的氧化鋯珠,於珠磨裝置中以周速10m/s、滯留時間3小時來實施分散處理,獲得PG58的分散油墨。 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (75 parts), PG58 (17 parts) as a green pigment, and a dispersing agent (Solsperse 5500 manufactured by Lubrizol Co., Ltd.) (8 parts) The mixture was mixed and stirred with a stirrer for 3 hours to prepare a mill base having a solid concentration of 25%. To the paste, 600 parts of 0.5 mm Φ zirconia beads were used, and dispersion treatment was carried out in a bead mill at a peripheral speed of 10 m/s and a residence time of 3 hours to obtain a dispersion ink of PG58.

繼而,將下述組成的各成分進行混合,製備作為綠色組成物的比較用感光性著色組成物1。該比較用感光性著色組成物1中,以成為與實施例1中的色度值(x、y)相同的色度值(x、y)的方式來調整有色材料的組成。 Then, each component of the following composition was mixed to prepare a comparative photosensitive coloring composition 1 as a green composition. In the comparative photosensitive coloring composition 1, the composition of the colored material was adjusted so as to have the same chromaticity value (x, y) as the chromaticity value (x, y) in the first embodiment.

-比較用感光性著色組成物1的組成- - Comparison of the composition of photosensitive coloring composition 1 -

.PG58的分散油墨…27.1份 . Disperse ink of PG58...27.1 parts

.分散劑(日本路博潤(Lubrizol)公司製造的索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)5500)…2.3份 . Dispersant (Solsperse 5500, manufactured by Lubrizol, Japan)...2.3 parts

.有機溶劑(丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯)…63.9份 . Organic solvent (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate)...63.9 parts

.氟系界面活性劑(迪愛生(DIC)公司製造的美佳法(Megafac)F554)…0.02份 . Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafac F554) made by DiCai (DIC)...0.02 parts

.聚合性化合物(二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(日本化藥(股)製造))…4.3份 . Polymeric compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.))...4.3 parts

.光聚合起始劑(OXE-01(巴斯夫(BASF)公司製造))…1.4份 . Photopolymerization initiator (OXE-01 (manufactured by BASF)) 1.4 parts

.黃色染料(所述化合物H1)…1.0份 . Yellow dye (the compound H1)...1.0 parts

[比較例2] [Comparative Example 2]

除了將感光性著色組成物S1變更為以下的比較用感光性著色組成物2以外,以與實施例1相同的方式來製作帶有綠色濾光片的基板,對所製作的帶有綠色濾光片的基板進行與實施例1相同的評價。 A substrate with a green filter was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive coloring composition S1 was changed to the following comparative photosensitive coloring composition 2, and the resulting green-colored filter was produced. The substrate of the sheet was subjected to the same evaluation as in Example 1.

將結果示於下述表1中。 The results are shown in Table 1 below.

<比較用感光性著色組成物2的製備> <Preparation of Comparative Photosensitive Composition 2>

除了於分散油墨的製備中,將PG58變更為PG36、以及將滯留時間變更為2小時以外,以與PG58的分散油墨的製備相同的方式獲得PG36的分散油墨。 The dispersion ink of PG36 was obtained in the same manner as in the preparation of the dispersion ink of PG58 except that PG58 was changed to PG36 and the residence time was changed to 2 hours in the preparation of the dispersion ink.

繼而,將下述組成的各成分進行混合,製備作為綠色組成物的比較用感光性著色組成物2。該比較用感光性著色組成物2中,以成為與實施例1中的色度值(x、y)相同的色度值(x、y)的方式來調整有色材料的組成。 Then, each component of the following composition was mixed to prepare a comparative photosensitive coloring composition 2 as a green composition. In the comparative photosensitive coloring composition 2, the composition of the colored material was adjusted so as to have the same chromaticity value (x, y) as the chromaticity value (x, y) in the first embodiment.

-比較用感光性著色組成物2的組成- - Comparison of the composition of the photosensitive coloring composition 2 -

.PG36的分散油墨…27.6份 . Disperse ink of PG36...27.6 parts

.分散劑(日本路博潤(Lubrizol)公司製造的索爾斯帕斯(Solsperse)5500)…2.8份 . Dispersant (Solsperse 5500, manufactured by Lubrizol, Japan)...2.8 parts

.有機溶劑(丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯)…63.5份 . Organic solvent (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate)...63.5 parts

.氟系界面活性劑(迪愛生(DIC)公司製造的美佳法(Megafac)F554)…0.02份 . Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafac F554) made by DiCai (DIC)...0.02 parts

.聚合性化合物(二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(日本化藥(股)製造))…4.3份 . Polymeric compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.))...4.3 parts

.光聚合起始劑(OXE-01(巴斯夫(BASF)公司製造))…1.4份 . Photopolymerization initiator (OXE-01 (manufactured by BASF)) 1.4 parts

.黃色染料(所述化合物H1)…0.4份 . Yellow dye (the compound H1)...0.4 parts

如表1所示,使用包含通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的綠色濾光片的實施例1~實施例15中,與使用比較的酞菁化合物的比較例1~比較例3相比較,△Y大,且藉由使用藍色LED及量子點而帶來的綠色光的亮度提高效果顯著。 As shown in Table 1, in Examples 1 to 15, in which a green filter containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1) was used, Comparative Example 1 to Comparative Example 3 using a comparative phthalocyanine compound were used. In comparison, ΔY is large, and the effect of improving the brightness of green light by using a blue LED and a quantum dot is remarkable.

圖2中表示實施例1及比較例2中的帶有綠色濾光片的基板的透射率光譜。 2 shows the transmittance spectra of the substrates with green filters in Example 1 and Comparative Example 2.

另外,圖2中,將實施例1以外使用的由2種背光單元產生的光的發光光譜合併表示。 In addition, in FIG. 2, the luminescence spectrum of the light generated by the two types of backlight units used other than Example 1 is shown in combination.

此處,所謂由2種背光單元產生的光的發光光譜,詳細而言是指來自藍色LED的藍色光藉由YAG螢光體轉換而成的白色光的光譜(圖2中,「藍色LED+YAG螢光體」)、以及來自藍色LED的藍色光藉由量子點轉換而成的白色光的光譜(圖2中,「藍色LED+量子點」)。 Here, the luminescence spectrum of light generated by the two kinds of backlight units refers in detail to the spectrum of white light converted from the blue light of the blue LED by the YAG phosphor (in FIG. 2, "blue" The spectrum of white light converted by quantum dots (LED + YAG phosphor) and the blue light from the blue LED ("blue LED + quantum dot" in Fig. 2).

圖2中雖省略圖示,但關於該些光的發光光譜,縱軸為強度(Intensity)。 Although not shown in FIG. 2, the vertical axis of the light emission spectrum of the light is intensity.

圖2中,帶有綠色濾光片的基板的透射率光譜是使用大塚電子(股)製造的分光光度計「MCPD-3700」,將測定波長範圍設為200nm~800nm來測定。 In FIG. 2, the transmittance spectrum of the substrate with a green filter is measured using a spectrophotometer "MCPD-3700" manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., and the measurement wavelength range is 200 nm to 800 nm.

另外,圖2中,由背光單元產生的光的發光光譜是使用拓普康(Topcon)(股)製造的分光放射計「SR-3」,將自該分光放射計至樣本(光轉換部:量子點構件或者YAG螢光體)為止的距離設為70mm,將測定角設為0.2度,將測定模式設為「自動」, 且將測定波長範圍設為380nm~780nm來測定。 In addition, in FIG. 2, the luminescence spectrum of the light generated by the backlight unit is a spectroradiometer "SR-3" manufactured by Topcon, and the spectroradiometer is supplied from the spectrometer to the sample (light conversion section: The distance from the quantum dot member or the YAG phosphor is 70 mm, the measurement angle is 0.2 degrees, and the measurement mode is "automatic". The measurement was carried out by setting the measurement wavelength range to 380 nm to 780 nm.

如圖2所示來確認,實施例1的綠色濾光片(著色劑為例示化合物A-1以及化合物H1)與比較例2的綠色濾光片(著色劑為PG58以及化合物H1)相比較,「藍色LED+量子點」中的綠色光的波長區域(500nm~560nm)的透射率高。 As shown in FIG. 2, it was confirmed that the green color filter (the coloring agent is exemplified as the compound A-1 and the compound H1) of the first embodiment is compared with the green color filter of the second comparative example (the coloring agent is PG58 and the compound H1). The transmittance of the green light in the "blue LED + quantum dot" (500 nm to 560 nm) is high.

這被認為是實施例1的綠色光的亮度高的原因。 This is considered to be the cause of the high luminance of the green light of Example 1.

若對圖2進行更詳細的說明,則於「藍色LED+量子點」的發光光譜中,綠色光的波峰的極大值存在於波長530nm附近,該綠色光的波峰的半高寬約為30nm。與此相對,於「藍色LED+YAG螢光體」的發光光譜中,綠色光的區域的波峰寬,波峰的極大值存在於波長560nm附近,且該波峰的半高寬為100nm以上。 As will be described in more detail with reference to Fig. 2, in the light emission spectrum of "blue LED + quantum dot", the maximum value of the peak of green light exists in the vicinity of the wavelength of 530 nm, and the full width at half maximum of the peak of the green light is about 30 nm. On the other hand, in the light emission spectrum of the "blue LED + YAG phosphor", the peak of the green light region is wide, the maximum value of the peak exists near the wavelength of 560 nm, and the full width at half maximum of the peak is 100 nm or more.

另外,實施例1的透射率光譜於波長500nm附近具有極大值,包含該極大值的波峰的半高寬約為100nm。另外,實施例1的透射率光譜的波長500nm~530nm的範圍內的透射率為90%以上。與此相對,比較例1的透射率光譜於波長520nm附近具有極大值,包含該極大值的波峰的半高寬約為100nm。另外,比較例2的透射率光譜的波長500nm~530nm的範圍內的透射率小於90%。 Further, the transmittance spectrum of Example 1 has a maximum value in the vicinity of a wavelength of 500 nm, and the full width at half maximum of the peak including the maximum value is about 100 nm. Further, the transmittance of the transmittance spectrum of Example 1 in the range of 500 nm to 530 nm was 90% or more. On the other hand, the transmittance spectrum of Comparative Example 1 has a maximum value around the wavelength of 520 nm, and the full width at half maximum of the peak including the maximum value is about 100 nm. Further, the transmittance of the transmittance spectrum of Comparative Example 2 in the range of 500 nm to 530 nm was less than 90%.

如以上所述,與使用PG58的比較例2的透射率光譜相比較,使用通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物的實施例1的透射率光譜於短波長側具有透射率的極大值,而且,綠色的波長區域整體 的透射率提高。進而,如上所述,與「藍色LED+YAG螢光體」的發光光譜中的綠色光的波峰相比較,「藍色LED+量子點」的發光光譜中的綠色光的波峰是於短波長側具有極大值,且尖銳的(半高寬小的)波峰。 As described above, the transmittance spectrum of Example 1 using the phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1) has a maximum value of transmittance on the short-wavelength side as compared with the transmittance spectrum of Comparative Example 2 using PG58. Moreover, the green wavelength region as a whole The transmittance is increased. Further, as described above, the peak of the green light in the light emission spectrum of the "blue LED + quantum dot" is on the short wavelength side as compared with the peak of the green light in the light emission spectrum of the "blue LED + YAG phosphor". It has a very large value and a sharp (semi-high width and small width) peak.

根據以上原因而認為,與比較例2相比較,實施例1中顯著獲得藉由量子點帶來的綠色光的亮度提高的效果。 From the above reasons, it is considered that the effect of improving the luminance of the green light by the quantum dots is remarkably obtained in the first embodiment as compared with the comparative example 2.

由以上結果可知,通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物與現存的顏料系酞菁相比較,將背光由現有的「藍色LED+YAG螢光體」變更為「藍色LED+量子點」時的亮度提高率高。 From the above results, it is understood that the phthalocyanine compound represented by the general formula (1) is changed from the conventional "blue LED + YAG phosphor" to the "blue LED + quantum dot" as compared with the existing pigment phthalocyanine. The brightness increase rate is high.

通常,酞菁顏料的分光特性大致是由中心金屬或結晶結構來決定,不會因取代基等修飾基、或者表面處理中的顏料衍生物等的影響而大幅度變化。 In general, the spectral characteristics of a phthalocyanine pigment are determined mainly by a central metal or a crystal structure, and are not largely changed by the influence of a modifying group such as a substituent or a pigment derivative in a surface treatment.

與此相對,可知,通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物(染料)是具有與現有的酞菁顏料不同的極其特徵性的分光特性的化合物。而且可知,通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物作為量子點背光用的有色材料而極其有用。 On the other hand, the phthalocyanine compound (dye) represented by the formula (1) is a compound having extremely characteristic spectral characteristics different from those of the conventional phthalocyanine pigment. Further, it is understood that the phthalocyanine compound represented by the formula (1) is extremely useful as a colored material for quantum dot backlighting.

於2013年9月30日提出申請的日本專利申請第2013-205347號的揭示藉由參照而將其整體併入本說明書。本說明書中記載的所有文獻、專利申請、以及技術規格是與將各文獻、專利申請、以及技術規格藉由參照而併入的情況具體且分別揭示的情況相同程度地,藉由參照而併入本說明書中。 The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2013-205347, filed on Sep. 30, 2013, is hereby incorporated by reference. All documents, patent applications, and technical specifications described in the specification are incorporated by reference to the same extent as the respective disclosures of In this manual.

100‧‧‧液晶顯示裝置 100‧‧‧Liquid crystal display device

10B‧‧‧藍色濾光片 10B‧‧‧Blue filter

10G‧‧‧綠色濾光片 10G‧‧‧Green Filter

10R‧‧‧紅色濾光片 10R‧‧‧Red Filter

12‧‧‧透光性基板 12‧‧‧Transmissive substrate

14‧‧‧帶有彩色濾光片的基板 14‧‧‧Substrate with color filter

20‧‧‧液晶層 20‧‧‧Liquid layer

22‧‧‧對向基板 22‧‧‧ Alignment substrate

30‧‧‧液晶顯示面板 30‧‧‧LCD panel

40‧‧‧藍色LED(一次光源) 40‧‧‧Blue LED (primary light source)

42‧‧‧光轉換構件(光轉換部) 42‧‧‧Light conversion member (light conversion unit)

46‧‧‧導光構件 46‧‧‧Light guiding members

R、G、B‧‧‧量子點 R, G, B‧‧· Quantum dots

Claims (14)

一種顯示裝置,其包括:一次光源,發射出一次光;光轉換部,含有吸收所述一次光的至少一部分而發射出綠色光的量子點;以及綠色濾光片,透射所述綠色光,且含有下述通式(1)所表示的酞菁化合物, [通式(1)中,存在多個的X分別獨立地表示鹵素原子;存在多個的R1分別獨立地表示下述通式(2)或通式(3)所表示的基團;存在多個的R分別獨立地表示氫原子或者1價取代基;M表示Cu、Zn、V(=O)、Mg、Ni、Ti(=O)、Sn、或者Si;多個a分別獨立地表示0~4的整數,多個n分別獨立地表示0~4的整數, 多個r分別獨立地表示0~4的整數;其中,多個a中至少1個為1以上,多個n中至少1個為1以上;多個a、多個n與多個r的總和為16] [通式(2)及通式(3)中,存在b個的R2分別獨立地表示選自由下述通式(4)~通式(6)所組成的組群中的1價取代基;R3表示1價取代基;b表示1~5的整數,c表示0~4的整數;其中,通式(2)中,b與c的合計不會超過5;Y表示-O-、-S-、-SO2-、或者-NR8-;R8表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基] [通式(4)中,R4表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、可具 有取代基的氧烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的芳基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基;通式(5)中,d表示0~2的整數,於d為0或1的情況下,R5表示可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基,於d為2的情況下,R5表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的二烷基胺基、可具有取代基的二芳基胺基、或者可具有取代基的烷基芳基胺基;通式(6)中,R6表示可具有取代基的烷基、可具有取代基的芳基、可具有取代基的烷基羰基、可具有取代基的芳基羰基、可具有取代基的烷基磺醯基、可具有取代基的芳基磺醯基,R7表示氫原子、可具有取代基的烷基、或者可具有取代基的芳基]。 A display device comprising: a primary light source that emits primary light; a light conversion portion that includes a quantum dot that absorbs at least a portion of the primary light to emit green light; and a green filter that transmits the green light, and Containing a phthalocyanine compound represented by the following formula (1), In the general formula (1), a plurality of X atoms independently represent a halogen atom; and a plurality of R 1 each independently represent a group represented by the following formula (2) or (3); A plurality of R each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent; M represents Cu, Zn, V(=O), Mg, Ni, Ti(=O), Sn, or Si; and a plurality of a are independently represented An integer of 0 to 4, and a plurality of n each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and a plurality of r independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; wherein at least one of the plurality of a is 1 or more, and at least one of the plurality of n 1 is 1 or more; the sum of multiple a, multiple n and multiple r is 16] [In the general formula (2) and the general formula (3), the presence of b of R 2 independently represents a monovalent substituent selected from the group consisting of the following general formulae (4) to (6); R 3 represents a monovalent substituent; b represents an integer of 1 to 5, and c represents an integer of 0 to 4; wherein, in the general formula (2), the total of b and c does not exceed 5; Y represents -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -NR 8 -; R 8 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent] [In the formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an oxyalkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylamine group which may have a substituent, and a dialkylamino group having a substituent, an arylamine group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent; in the formula (5) d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent, and in the case where d is 2, R 5 represents An alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, a diarylamine group which may have a substituent, or an alkylarylamine group which may have a substituent In the formula (6), R 6 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, and a substituent which may have a substituent An alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, R 7 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic group which may have a substituent base]. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述一次光為藍色光。 The display device of claim 1, wherein the primary light is blue light. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述一次光源包含藍色發光二極體。 The display device of claim 2, wherein the primary light source comprises a blue light emitting diode. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述光轉換部更含有吸收所述一次光的一部分而發射出紅色光的無機螢光體,且藉由透射所述一次光的一部分而將所述一次光轉換為白色光。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the light conversion portion further comprises an inorganic phosphor that absorbs a part of the primary light and emits red light, and transmits the first time by transmitting The primary light is converted to white light by a portion of the light. 如申請專利範圍第4項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述無機螢光體為量子點。 The display device according to claim 4, wherein the inorganic phosphor is a quantum dot. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色光的發光光譜於波長500nm~550nm的範圍內具有極大值。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the luminescence spectrum of the green light has a maximum value in a wavelength range of 500 nm to 550 nm. 如申請專利範圍第6項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色光的發光光譜的半高寬為20nm~80nm。 The display device according to claim 6, wherein the green light has a full width at half maximum of 20 nm to 80 nm. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中於所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中,存在於波長460nm~550nm的範圍內具有極大值的波峰。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the transmission spectrum of the green filter has a peak having a maximum value in a wavelength range of 460 nm to 550 nm. 如申請專利範圍第8項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中的所述波峰的半高寬為80nm~200nm。 The display device according to claim 8, wherein the half-height of the peak in the transmission spectrum of the green filter is from 80 nm to 200 nm. 如申請專利範圍第8項所述的顯示裝置,其中於所述綠色濾光片的透射光譜中,波長500nm~530nm的範圍內的透射率為90%以上。 The display device according to claim 8, wherein a transmittance in a wavelength range of 500 nm to 530 nm is 90% or more in a transmission spectrum of the green filter. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述綠色濾光片更含有黃色染料。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the green filter further contains a yellow dye. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述量子點為包含選自由II-VI族化合物、III-V族化合物、IV-VI族化合物、以及IV族化合物所組成的組群中的至少1種的半導體奈米粒子。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the quantum dot comprises a component selected from the group consisting of a group II-VI compound, a group III-V compound, a group IV-VI compound, and a group IV compound. At least one type of semiconductor nanoparticle in the group. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其中所述量子點為包含選自由CdSe、CdTe、ZnS、ZnSe、ZnTe、ZnO、HgS、HgSe、HgTe、CdSeS、CdSeTe、CdSTe、ZnSeS、ZnSeTe、 ZnSTe、HgSeS、HgSeTe、HgSTe、CdZnS、CdZnSe、CdZnTe、CdHgS、CdHgSe、CdHgTe、HgZnS、HgZnSe、HgZnTe、CdZnSeS、CdZnSeTe、CdZnSTe、CdHgSeS、CdHgSeTe、CdHgSTe、HgZnSeS、HgZnSeTe、HgZnSTe、GaN、GaP、GaAs、GaSb、AlN、AlP、AlAs、AlSb、InN、InP、InAs、InSb、GaNP、GaNAs、GaNSb、GaPAs、GaPSb、AlNP、AlNAs、AlNSb、AlPAs、AlPSb、InNP、InNAs、InNSb、InPAs、InPSb、GaAlNP、GaAlNAs、GaAlNSb、GaAlPAs、GaAlPSb、GaInNP、GaInNAs、GaInNSb、GaInPAs、GaInPSb、InAlNP、InAlNAs、InAlNSb、InAlPAs、InAlPSb、SnS、SnSe、SnTe、PbS、PbSe、PbTe、SnSeS、SnSeTe、SnSTe、PbSeS、PbSeTe、PbSTe、SnPbS、SnPbSe、SnPbTe、SnPbSSe、SnPbSeTe、SnPbSTe、Si、Ge、SiC、以及SiGe所組成的組群中的至少1種的半導體奈米粒子。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the quantum dot comprises a layer selected from the group consisting of CdSe, CdTe, ZnS, ZnSe, ZnTe, ZnO, HgS, HgSe, HgTe, CdSeS, CdSeTe, CdSTe, ZnSeS, ZnSeTe, ZnSTe, HgSeS, HgSeTe, HgSTe, CdZnS, CdZnSe, CdZnTe, CdHgS, CdHgSe, CdHgTe, HgZnS, HgZnSe, HgZnTe, CdZnSeS, CdZnSeTe, CdZnSTe, CdHgSeS, CdHgSeTe, CdHgSTe, HgZnSeS, HgZnSeTe, HgZnSTe, GaN, GaP, GaAs, GaSb, AlN, AlP, AlAs, AlSb, InN, InP, InAs, InSb, GaNP, GaNAs, GaNSb, GaPAs, GaPSb, AlNP, AlNAs, AlNSb, AlPAs, AlPSb, InNP, InNAs, InNSb, InPAs, InPSb, GaAlNP, GaAlNAs, GaAlNSb, GaAlPAs, GaAlPSb, GaInNP, GaInNAs, GaInNSb, GaInPAs, GaInPSb, InAlNP, InAlNAs, InAlNSb, InAlPAs, InAlPSb, SnS, SnSe, SnTe, PbS, PbSe, PbTe, SnSeS, SnSeTe, SnSTe, PbSeS, PbSeTe, At least one semiconductor nanoparticle of a group consisting of PbSTe, SnPbS, SnPbSe, SnPbTe, SnPbSSe, SnPbSeTe, SnPbSTe, Si, Ge, SiC, and SiGe. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述的顯示裝置,其包括:所述一次光源;所述光轉換部;以及液晶顯示面板或者有機電致發光顯示面板,包含所述綠色濾光片。 The display device according to claim 1 or 2, comprising: the primary light source; the light conversion portion; and a liquid crystal display panel or an organic electroluminescence display panel, including the green filter .
TW103131258A 2013-09-30 2014-09-11 Display device TW201512310A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013205347A JP6165578B2 (en) 2013-09-30 2013-09-30 Display device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201512310A true TW201512310A (en) 2015-04-01

Family

ID=52742885

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW103131258A TW201512310A (en) 2013-09-30 2014-09-11 Display device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6165578B2 (en)
TW (1) TW201512310A (en)
WO (1) WO2015045735A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI698475B (en) * 2015-07-29 2020-07-11 日商Jsr股份有限公司 Resin composition, film, wavelength conversion member, and film forming method
TWI705297B (en) * 2015-12-03 2020-09-21 南韓商東友精細化工有限公司 Self emission type photosensitive resin composition, color filter, and image display device produced using the same
TWI759424B (en) * 2017-02-16 2022-04-01 日商住友化學股份有限公司 Curable resin composition, cured film and display device

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2015232694A (en) * 2014-05-13 2015-12-24 Jsr株式会社 Color filter, display element, red pixel, and green pixel
WO2016163196A1 (en) * 2015-04-07 2016-10-13 株式会社村田製作所 Liquid crystal display device
JP2016212348A (en) * 2015-05-13 2016-12-15 株式会社 オルタステクノロジー Liquid crystal display
WO2016196387A1 (en) * 2015-05-29 2016-12-08 Harman International Industries, Incorporated Wide color-gamut vehicle infotainment display system
US10656465B2 (en) 2015-05-29 2020-05-19 Harman International Industries, Incorporated Wide color-gamut vehicle infotainment display system with quantum dot element
US11112653B2 (en) 2015-05-29 2021-09-07 Harman International Industries, Incorporated Wide color-gamut vehicle infotainment display system with quantum dot element
CN107302672A (en) * 2016-04-15 2017-10-27 深圳市华想世纪科技有限公司 A kind of quantum dot and the LCD TV of YAG fluorescent powder blending
US10768477B2 (en) 2016-06-27 2020-09-08 Unique Materials Co., Ltd. Backlight module
JP2018081195A (en) * 2016-11-16 2018-05-24 Nsマテリアルズ株式会社 Liquid crystal display device
JP2019117734A (en) * 2017-12-27 2019-07-18 優美特創新材料股▲ふん▼有限公司 Backlight module
JP2021105712A (en) 2019-12-26 2021-07-26 住友化学株式会社 Display
JP2022027519A (en) 2020-07-30 2022-02-10 住友化学株式会社 Display device

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012108435A1 (en) * 2011-02-10 2012-08-16 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition, and color filter
KR101794653B1 (en) * 2011-07-05 2017-11-08 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Liquid Crystal Display and its panel having a light conversion layer
JP5914052B2 (en) * 2012-03-02 2016-05-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition and color filter
JP2013182213A (en) * 2012-03-02 2013-09-12 Fujifilm Corp Curable coloring composition and color filter
KR102059198B1 (en) * 2012-03-22 2019-12-24 가부시키가이샤 닛폰 쇼쿠바이 Light selective transmission filter, resin sheet, and solid-state image sensing device
JP6054649B2 (en) * 2012-06-22 2016-12-27 株式会社日本触媒 Light selective transmission filter forming resin composition and use thereof

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI698475B (en) * 2015-07-29 2020-07-11 日商Jsr股份有限公司 Resin composition, film, wavelength conversion member, and film forming method
TWI705297B (en) * 2015-12-03 2020-09-21 南韓商東友精細化工有限公司 Self emission type photosensitive resin composition, color filter, and image display device produced using the same
TWI759424B (en) * 2017-02-16 2022-04-01 日商住友化學股份有限公司 Curable resin composition, cured film and display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2015069142A (en) 2015-04-13
JP6165578B2 (en) 2017-07-19
WO2015045735A1 (en) 2015-04-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW201512310A (en) Display device
TWI647103B (en) Liquid crystal display device
US10139676B2 (en) Light conversion device and display apparatus comprising the same
TWI583775B (en) Color conversion film and method of preparing the same and back light unit comprising the same
CN110730927B (en) Display device
KR20160112499A (en) Yellow curable resin composition, and color filter comprising thereof and display device comprising of the same
TW202000863A (en) Photostable cyano-substituted boron-dipyrromethene dye as green emitter for display and illumination applications
TW202336209A (en) Composition, light-absorbing layer, laminate, and display device
JP7297756B2 (en) Cyanoaryl-substituted benzo(thio)xanthene compounds
KR101932221B1 (en) Yellow curable resin composition, and color filter and display device comprising the same
JP6770196B2 (en) Yellow curable resin composition, color filter and image display device manufactured using this
KR102512672B1 (en) Yellow curable resin composition, and color filter comprising thereof and display device comprising of the same
WO2022024743A1 (en) Display device
KR102346577B1 (en) Color conversion pixel, composition for the color conversion pixel and display device comprising the same
TW201510099A (en) Optical substrate and display device
JP2015036796A5 (en)
JP2017049409A (en) Liquid crystal display
KR20190108781A (en) Yellow curableresin composition, color filter and display device having the same
JP2019089943A (en) Resin composition for color correction optical filter, and color correction optical filter containing resin composition
JP2017049442A (en) Liquid crystal display